CA2444031C - 3,4-di-substituted cyclobutene-1,2-diones as cxc-chemokine receptor ligands - Google Patents

3,4-di-substituted cyclobutene-1,2-diones as cxc-chemokine receptor ligands Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CA2444031C
CA2444031C CA2444031A CA2444031A CA2444031C CA 2444031 C CA2444031 C CA 2444031C CA 2444031 A CA2444031 A CA 2444031A CA 2444031 A CA2444031 A CA 2444031A CA 2444031 C CA2444031 C CA 2444031C
Authority
CA
Canada
Prior art keywords
substituted
group
unsubstituted
compound
alkyl
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Expired - Lifetime
Application number
CA2444031A
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
CA2444031A1 (en
Inventor
Arthur G. Taveras
Cynthia J. Aki
Richard W. Bond
Jianping Chao
Michael Dwyer
Johan A. Ferreira
Jianhua Chao
Younong Yu
John J. Baldwin
Bernd Kaiser
Ge Li
J. Robert Merritt
Kingsley H. Nelson
Laura L. Rokosz
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Pharmacopeia LLC
Merck Sharp and Dohme LLC
Original Assignee
Pharmacopeia LLC
Schering Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Pharmacopeia LLC, Schering Corp filed Critical Pharmacopeia LLC
Publication of CA2444031A1 publication Critical patent/CA2444031A1/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of CA2444031C publication Critical patent/CA2444031C/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Expired - Lifetime legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D231/00Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings
    • C07D231/02Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D231/10Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D231/14Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D231/38Nitrogen atoms
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/02Stomatological preparations, e.g. drugs for caries, aphtae, periodontitis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/04Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/04Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system for throat disorders
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06Antiasthmatics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/12Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the kidneys
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/02Drugs for dermatological disorders for treating wounds, ulcers, burns, scars, keloids, or the like
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/06Antipsoriatics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/10Anti-acne agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/08Antiepileptics; Anticonvulsants
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02Ophthalmic agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04Antibacterial agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12Antivirals
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12Antivirals
    • A61P31/14Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A61P31/18Antivirals for RNA viruses for HIV
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12Antivirals
    • A61P31/20Antivirals for DNA viruses
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12Antivirals
    • A61P31/20Antivirals for DNA viruses
    • A61P31/22Antivirals for DNA viruses for herpes viruses
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P33/00Antiparasitic agents
    • A61P33/02Antiprotozoals, e.g. for leishmaniasis, trichomoniasis, toxoplasmosis
    • A61P33/06Antimalarials
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02Immunomodulators
    • A61P37/06Immunosuppressants, e.g. drugs for graft rejection
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/08Antiallergic agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P39/00General protective or antinoxious agents
    • A61P39/02Antidotes
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A61P7/02Antithrombotic agents; Anticoagulants; Platelet aggregation inhibitors
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/14Vasoprotectives; Antihaemorrhoidals; Drugs for varicose therapy; Capillary stabilisers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07CACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C225/00Compounds containing amino groups and doubly—bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton, at least one of the doubly—bound oxygen atoms not being part of a —CHO group, e.g. amino ketones
    • C07C225/20Compounds containing amino groups and doubly—bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton, at least one of the doubly—bound oxygen atoms not being part of a —CHO group, e.g. amino ketones having amino groups bound to carbon atoms of rings other than six-membered aromatic rings of the carbon skeleton
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07CACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C237/00Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by amino groups
    • C07C237/28Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by amino groups having the carbon atom of at least one of the carboxamide groups bound to a carbon atom of a non-condensed six-membered aromatic ring of the carbon skeleton
    • C07C237/30Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by amino groups having the carbon atom of at least one of the carboxamide groups bound to a carbon atom of a non-condensed six-membered aromatic ring of the carbon skeleton having the nitrogen atom of the carboxamide group bound to hydrogen atoms or to acyclic carbon atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07CACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C255/00Carboxylic acid nitriles
    • C07C255/49Carboxylic acid nitriles having cyano groups bound to carbon atoms of six-membered aromatic rings of a carbon skeleton
    • C07C255/58Carboxylic acid nitriles having cyano groups bound to carbon atoms of six-membered aromatic rings of a carbon skeleton containing cyano groups and singly-bound nitrogen atoms, not being further bound to other hetero atoms, bound to the carbon skeleton
    • C07C255/59Carboxylic acid nitriles having cyano groups bound to carbon atoms of six-membered aromatic rings of a carbon skeleton containing cyano groups and singly-bound nitrogen atoms, not being further bound to other hetero atoms, bound to the carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being further substituted by singly-bound oxygen atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/72Nitrogen atoms
    • C07D213/74Amino or imino radicals substituted by hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D307/00Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D307/02Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings
    • C07D307/34Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D307/38Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D307/52Radicals substituted by nitrogen atoms not forming part of a nitro radical
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D333/00Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D333/02Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings
    • C07D333/04Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings not substituted on the ring sulphur atom
    • C07D333/26Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings not substituted on the ring sulphur atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D333/30Hetero atoms other than halogen
    • C07D333/36Nitrogen atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07CACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C2601/00Systems containing only non-condensed rings
    • C07C2601/04Systems containing only non-condensed rings with a four-membered ring

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Dermatology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Tropical Medicine & Parasitology (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Transplantation (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)

Abstract

There are disclosed compounds of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof which are useful for the treatment of chemokine-mediated diseases such as acute and chronic inflammatory disorders and cancer.

Description

DEMANDES OU BREVETS VOLUMINEUX
LA PRESENTE PARTIE DE CETTE DEMANDE OU CE BREVETS
COMPREND PLUS D'UN TOME.
CECI EST LE TOME DE _2 NOTE: Pour les tomes additionels, veillez contacter le Bureau Canadien des Brevets.

JUMBO APPLICATIONS / PATENTS

THIS SECTION OF THE APPLICATION / PATENT CONTAINS MORE
THAN ONE VOLUME.

NOTE: For additional volumes please contact the Canadian Patent Office.

3.4-DI-SUBSTITUTED CYCLOBUTENE-1.2-DIONES
AS CXC-CHEMOKINE RECEPTOR LIGANDS

FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to novel substituted cyclobutenedione compounds, pharmaceutical compositions containing the compounds, and the use of the compounds and formulations in treating CXC chemokine-mediated diseases.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Chemokines are chemotactic cytokines that are released by a wide variety of cells to attract macrophages, T-cells, eosinophils, basophils, neutrophils and endothelial cells to sites of inflammation and tumor growth. There are two main classes of chemokines, the CXC-chemokines and the CC- chemokines. The class depends on whether the first two cysteines are separated by a single amino acid (CXC-chemokines) or are adjacent (CC-chemokines). The CXC-chemoklnes include interleukin-8 (IL-8), neutrophil-activating protein-1 (NAP-1), neutrophil-activating protein-2 (NAP-2), GROa, GROR, GROy, ENA-78, GCP-2, IP-10, MIG and PF4. CC
chemokines include RANTES, MIP -1a, MIP-2(3, monocyte chemotactic protein-1 (MCP-1), MCP-2, MCP-3 and eotaxin. Individual members of the chemokine families are known to be bound by at least one chemokine receptor, with CXC-chemokines generally bound by members of the CXCR class of receptors, and CC-chemokines by members of the CCR class of receptors. For example, IL-8 is bound by the CXCR-and CXCR-2 receptors.

Since CXC-chemokines promote the accumulation and activation of neutrophils, these chemokines have been implicated in a wide range of acute and chronic inflammatory disorders Including psoriasis and rheumatoid arthritis.
Baggiolini et al., FEBS Left. 307, 97 (1992); Miller et al., Crit. Rev. Immunol. 12, 17 (1992);

..... -----Oppenheim et al., Annu. Fev. Immunol. 9, 617 (1991); Seitz et al., J. Clin.
Invest. 87, 463 (1991); Miller et al., Am. Rev. Respir. Dis. 146, 427 (1992); Donnely et al., Lancet 341, 643 (1993).
ELRCXC chemokines including IL-8, GROa, GROR, GROy, NAP-2, and ENA-78 (Strieter et al. 1995 JBC 270 p. 27348-57) have also been implicated in the induction of tumor angiogenesis (new blood vessel growth). All of these chemokines are believed to exert their actions by binding to the 7 transmembrane G-protein coupled receptor CXCR2 (also known as IL-8RB), while IL-8 also binds CXCRI
(also known as IL-813A). Thus, their angiogenic activity is due to their binding to and io activation of CXCR2, and possible CXCR1 for IL-8, expressed on the surface of vascular endothelial cells (ECs) in surrounding vessels.
Many different types of tumors have been shown to produce ELRCXC
chemokines and their production has been correlated with a more aggressive phenotype (Inoue et al. 2000 Clin Cancer Res 6 p. 2104-2119) and poor prognosis (Yoneda et. al. 1998 J Nat Cancer Inst 90 p. 447-454). Chemokines are potent chemotactic factors and the ELRCXC chemokines have been shown to induce EC
chemotaxis. Thus, these chemokines probably induce chemotaxis of endothelial cells toward their site of production in the tumor. This may be a critical step in the induction of angiogenesis by the tumor. Inhibitors of CXCR2 or dual inhibitors of CXCR2 and CXCR1 will inhibit the angiogenic activity of the ELRCXC chemokines and therefore block the growth of the tumor. This anti-tumor activity has been demonstrated for antibodies to IL-8 (Arenberg et al. 1996 J Clin Invest 97 p. 2792-2802), ENA-(Arenberg et al. 1998 J Clin Invest 102 p. 465-72), and GROa (Haghnegahdar et al.
J. Leukoc Biology 2000 67 p. 53-62).
Many tumor cells have also been shown to express CXCR2 and thus tumor cells may also stimulate their own growth when they secrete ELRCXC chemokines.
Thus, along with decreasing angiogenesis, inhibitors of CXCR2 may directly inhibit the growth of tumor cells.
Hence, the CXC-chemokine receptors represent promising targets for the development of novel anti-inflammatory and anti-tumor agents.
There remains a need for compounds that are capable of modulating activity at CXC-chemokine receptors. For example, conditions associated with an increase in IL-8 production (which is responsible for chemotaxis of neutrophil and T-cell subsets into the inflammatory site and growth of tumors) would benefit by compounds that are inhibitors of IL-8 receptor binding.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
This invention provides compounds of the formula (I):

B,N N-A
H H
(I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof wherein A is selected from the group consisting of R7 R$ R7 R8 R7 R8 R7 R$
R7 R8 R7 R8 R7 R8 0 ~ S
rj" N .O N\-`

R~.iNO R9 R9 i-ONH
NLRBRBa Rs O O
O-~- R8 Rs Rs R7 R8 -~X

O--d R9 N

Rs Rs n n0-6 1 it X
X

X=O, NH, S

n LN, R `R14 n=1-5 N 'O O 9 N
- / R
R9 N N,N N_N

N=S S/>- \
- ' R9 rI
N

N
N N--/ N

SOS _ YR9 Rs Rs R
and ~
S-~ R9 N

B is selected from the group consisting of 3 I \
R
RNN-N, ' N}~NH

R

NH

R1 \ R11 R

R12 R10 N NJ" N
R3 3 I / R3 \ i R N

R3 R3 \ I R3 N
OH
OH OH

S
and R3 R2 is hydrogen, OH, -C(O)OH, -SH, -S02NR13R14, -NHC(O)R13, -NHSO2NR13R14, -NHSO2R13 , -NR13R14, -C(O)NR13R14, -C(O)NHOR13, -C(O)NR13OH, - S(02)OH, -OC(O)R13 or an unsubstituted or substituted heterocyclic acidic functional group, ------- ---- ..

wherein the substituents on the substituted R2 groups are the same or different and independently selected from 1-6 R9 groups;
R3 and R4 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, cyano, halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, -OH, -CF3, -OCF3, -NO2, -C(O)R13, -C(O)OR13, -C(O)NHR17, -C(O)NR13R14, C`R14 -SO(t)NR13R14, -SO(t)R13, -C(O)NR130R14, I
p-R31 R14. N
11 - r]
O
R30-N , -NHC(O)R17, unsubstituted or substituted aryl and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, wherein the substituents on the substituted R3 and R4 groups are the same or different and independently selected from 1-6 R9 groups;
R5 and R6 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, -CF3, -OCF3, -NO2, -C(O)R13, -C(O)OR13, -C(O)NR13R14, -SO~t~NR13R14, -C(O)NR13OR14, cyano, an unsubstituted or substituted aryl and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl group, 1s wherein the substituents on the substituted R5 and R6 groups are the same or different and independently selected from 1-6 R9 groups;
R7 and R8 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of H, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl, -C02R13, -CONR'3R"4, fluoroalkyl, alkynyl, alkynylalkyl, alkenyl, alkenylalkyl and cycloalkenyl, wherein the substituents on the substituted R7 and R8 groups are selected from the group consisting of a) H, b) halogen, c) -CF3, d) -COR3, e) -OR13, f) -NR13R14, g) -NO2, h) -CN, i) -S02OR13, j) -Si(alkyl)3, k) -Si(aryl)3, 1) - (R13)2R14Si, m) -C02R13, n) -C(O)NR13R14, o) -S02NR13R14, p) -S02R13, q) -O(C=O)R13, r) -O(C=O)NR13R14, s) -NR 13C(O)R14 , and t) -NR13CO2R14;
R8a is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl and cycloalkylalkyl;
R9 is independently selected from 1-6 of the group consisting of.
a) -R13, b) halogen, c) -CF3, d) -COR13, e) -OR13, f) -NR13R14, g) -NO2, h) -CN, i) -S02R13, j) -S02NR13R14, k) -NR13COR14, I) -CONR13R14 , m) -NR13C02R14, n) -CO2R13, and N N\

NH
N
o) R10 and R11 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, -CF3, -OCF3, -NR13R14, -NR13C(O)NR13R14, -OH, -C(O)OR13, -SH, -SO(t)NR13R14, -S02R13, -NHC(O)R13, -NHS02NR13R14, -NHS02R13, -C(O)NR13R14, -C(O)NR13OR14, -OC(O)R13 and cyano;
R12 is hydrogen, -OC(O)R13, or an unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl or unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl group, wherein the substituents on the substituted R12 groups are the same or different and independently selected from 1-6 R9 groups;
R13 and R14 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of H, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl, and unsubstituted or substituted fluoroalkyl, or R13 and R14 can be taken together when both are attached to a nitrogen atom to form an unsubstituted or substituted 3 to 7 membered heterocylic ring containing one to two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen, wherein the substitutents on the substituted R13 and R14 groups are the same or different and independently selected from 1-6 of H, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, fluroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, amino, -C(O)OR15, -C(O)NR15R16, -S(O)tNR15R16, -C(O)R15, -S02R15, -NHC(O)NR13R14 and halogen;
R15 and R16 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heteroaryl;

R17 is -SO2 -SO2 -SO2 or -SO2heteroaryl;
R30 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, -CN, -NO2, or -S02R 15;
R31 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl and unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl;
wherein the substituents on the substituted R31 groups are the same or different and independently selected from 1-6 R9 groups; and t is 0, 1 or 2.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
This invention provides compounds of the formula (I):
O
B.N N-A
H H
(l) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof wherein the substituents are as defined in the Summary of the Invention.
Another aspect of the present invention is a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of formula (I) in combination or association with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
Another aspect of the present invention is a method of treating an a-chemokine mediated disease in a mammal which comprises administering to a patient in need thereof of a therapeutically effective amount of the compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
Examples of chemokine mediated diseases include psoriasis, atopic dermatitis, acne, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, adult respiratory distress syndrome, arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, septic shock, endotoxic shock, gram negative sepsis, toxic shock syndrome, stroke, cardiac and renal reperfusion injury, glomerulo-nephritis or thrombosis, alzheimer's disease, graft vs. host reaction, allograft rejections, malaria, adult respiratory disease, acute respiratory distress syndrome, delayed type hypersensitivity reaction, atherosclerosis and cerebral and cardiac ischemia.
Another aspect of the present invention is a method of treating cancer, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof, concurrently or sequentially, a therapeutically effective amount of (a) a compound of formula (I), and (b) a microtubule affecting agent or antineoplastic agent or anti-angiogenesis agent or VEGF receptor kinase inhibitor or antibodies against the VEGF receptor or interferon, and/or c) radiation.
In further embodiments, a compound of formula (I) is combined with one of the following antineoplastic agents: gemcitabine, paclitaxel (Taxol ), 5-Fluorouracil (5-FU), cyclophosphamide (Cytoxan ), temozolomide, taxotere or Vincristine.
In another embodiment, the present invention provides a method of treating cancer, comprising administering, concurrently or sequentially, an effective amount of (a) a compound of formula (I), and (b) a microtubule affecting agent (e.g., paclitaxel).

Unless indicated otherwise, the following definitions apply throughout the present specification and claims. These definitions apply regardless of whether a term is used by itself or in combination with other terms. Hence the definition of "alkyl"
applies to "alkyl" as well as to the "alkyl" portions of "alkoxy", etc.
When any variable (e.g., aryl, R2) occurs more than one time in any constituent, its definition on each occurrence is independent of its definition at every other occurrence. Also, combinations of substituents and/or variables are permissible only if such combinations result in stable compounds.
"Patient" includes both human and other mammals.
"Mammal" means humans and other animals. Preferably, mammal means humans.
"Alkyl" means a straight or branched saturated hydrocarbon chain having the designated number of carbon atoms. Where the number of carbon atoms is not specified, 1 to 20 carbons are intended. Preferred alkyl groups contain 1 to 12 carbon atoms in the chain. More preferred alkyl groups contain 1 to 6 carbon atoms in the chain.
"Alkoxy" means an alkyl-O group in which alkyl is as previously defined. Non-limiting examples of alkoxy groups include methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, iso-propoxy and n-butoxy. The bond to the parent moiety is through the ether oxygen.
"Alkenyl" means an aliphatic hydrocarbon group containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond and which may be straight or branched. Where the number of carbon atoms is not specified, 2 to 20 carbons are intended.
Preferred alkenyl groups have 2 to 12 carbon atoms in the chain; and more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms in the chain. Non-limiting examples of suitable alkenyl groups include ethenyl, propenyl, n-butenyl, 3-methylbut-2-enyl, n-pentenyl, octenyl and decenyl.
"Alkynyl" means an aliphatic hydrocarbon group containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bond and which may be straight or branched. Where the number of carbon atoms is not specified, 2 to 15 carbons are intended. Preferred alkynyl groups have 2 to 12 carbon atoms in the chain; and more preferably 2 to 4 carbon atoms in the chain. Non-limiting examples of suitable alkynyl groups include ethynyl, propynyl, 2-butynyl, 3-methylbutynyl, n-pentynyl, and decynyl.
"Aryl" means an aromatic monocyclic or multicyclic ring system comprising about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms, preferably about 6 to about 10 carbon atoms.
Non-limiting examples of suitable aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indanyl, anthracenyl, fluorenyl and the like.
"Arylalkyl" means an aryl-alkyl group in which the aryl and alkyl groups are as defined. Non-limiting examples of suitable arylalkyl groups include benzyl, phenethyl and naphthleneylmethyl. The bond to the parent moiety is through the alkyl group.
"Cycloalkyl" means a non-aromatic ring system having 3 to 10 carbon atoms and one to three rings, preferably 5 to 10 carbon atoms. Preferred cycloalkyl rings contain 5 to 7 ring atoms. Non-limiting examples of cycloalkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, norbornyl, adamantyl and the like.
"Cycloalkylalkyl" means a cycloalkyl group attached to the parent moiety through an alkyl group. Non -limiting examples include cyclopropylmethyl, cyclohexylmethyl and the like.
"Cycloalkenyl" means a non-aromatic mono or multicyclic ring system comprising 3 to 10 carbon atoms, preferably 5 to 10 carbon atoms which contains at least one carbon-carbon double bond. Preferred cycloalkenyl rings contain 5 to 7 ring atoms. Non-limiting examples of cycloalkyl groups include cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptenyl, norbornenyl and the like.
"Cycloalkenyl" means a non-aromatic mono or multicyclic ring system comprising 3 to 10 carbon atoms, preferably 5 to 10 carbon atoms which contains at least one carbon-carbon double bond. Preferred cycloalkenyl rings contain 5 to 7 ring atoms. Non-limiting examples of cycloalkyl groups include cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptenyl, norbornenyl and the like.

"Halo" means fluoro, chloro, bromo, or iodo groups. Preferred are fluoro, chloro or bromo, and more preferred are fluoro and chloro.
"Halogen" means fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine. Preferred are fluorine, chlorine or bromine, and more preferred are fluorine and chlorine.
"Haloalkyl" means an alkyl group as defined above wherein one or more hydrogen atoms on the alkyl is replaced by a halo group defined above.
"Heterocyclyl" or "heterocyclic" means a non-aromatic saturated monocyclic or multicyclic ring system comprising 3 to 10 ring atoms, preferably 5 to 10 ring atoms, in which one or more of the atoms in the ring system is an element other than carbon, for example nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, alone or in combination. There are no adjacent oxygen and/or sulfur atoms present in the ring system. Preferred heterocyclyls contain 5 to 6 ring atoms. The prefix aza, oxa or thia before the heterocyclyl root name means that at least a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atom respectively is present as a ring atom.
is The nitrogen or sulfur atom of the heterocyclyl can be optionally oxidized to the corresponding N-oxide, S-oxide or S,S-dioxide. Non-limiting examples of suitable monocyclic heterocyclyl rings include piperidyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, thiazolidinyl, 1,3-dioxolanyl, 1,4-dioxanyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetra hyd roth io phenyl, tetra hyd roth io pyranyl, and the like.
The term heterocyclic acidic functional group is intended to include groups such as, pyrrole, imidazole, triazole, tetrazole, and the like.
"Heteroaryl" means an aromatic monocyclic or multicyclic ring system comprising 5 to 14 ring atoms, preferably 5 to 10 ring atoms, in which one or more of the ring atoms is an element other than carbon, for example nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, alone or in combination. Preferred heteroaryls contain 5 to 6 ring atoms. The prefix aza, oxa or thia before the heteroaryl root name means that at least a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atom respectively, is present as a ring atom. A nitrogen atom of a heteroaryl can be optionally oxidized to the corresponding N-oxide. Non-limiting examples of suitable heteroaryls include pyridyl, pyrazinyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrimidinyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, furazanyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, 1,2,4-thiadiazolyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, quinoxalinyl, phthalazinyl, imidazo[1,2-a]pyridinyl, imidazo[2,1-b]thiazolyl, benzofurazanyl, indolyl, azaindolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzothienyl, quinolinyl, imidazolyl, thienopyridyl, quinazolinyl, thienopyrimidyl, pyrrolopyridyl, imidazopyridyl, isoquinolinyl, benzoazaindolyl, 1,2,4-triazinyl, benzothiazolyl and the like.
"Heteroarylalkyl" means a heteroaryl-alkyl group where the bond to the parent moiety is through an alkyl group.
N-oxides can form on a tertiary nitrogen present in an R substituent, or on =N-in a heteroaryl ring substituent and are included in the compounds of formula I.
The term "prodrug," as used herein, represents compounds which are rapidly transformed in vivo to the parent compound of the above formula, for example, by hydrolysis in blood. A thorough discussion is provided in T. Higuchi and V.
Stella, Pro-io drugs as Novel Delivery Systems, Vol. 14 of the A.C.S. Symposium Series, and in Edward B. Roche, ed., Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press, 1987 .

As used herein, the term "composition" is intended to encompass a product is comprising the specified ingredients in the specified amounts, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from combination of the specified Ingredients in the specified amounts. Also, "Bn" represents benzyl.
R13 and R14 when taken together with the nitrogen they are attached to in the groups -NR13R14, -C(O)NR'3R14, -S02NR13R14, -OC(O)NR13R14, -CONR13R14, 20 -NR13C(O)NR13R14, -SOtNR13R14, -NHS02NR13R14 preferably form an unsubstituted or substituted 3 to 7 membered, saturated heterocyclic ring optionally containing one or two additional heteroatoms each independently selected from 0, S or NR18 wherein R18 is selected from H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -C(O)R19, -S02R19 and -C(O)NR19R20, wherein R19 and R20 are the same or different and each is Independently selected 25 from alkyl, aryl and heteroaryl, wherein the substituents on the substituted cyclized R13 and R14 groups are the same or different and independently selected from I to 3 of alkyl, aryl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, arylalkyl, fluoroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, amino, -C(O)OR15, -C(O)NR15R16, -SOtNR15R16, -C(O)R15, -S02R'5, -NHC(O)NR15R'6 and halogen, and wherein R15 and 30 R16 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heteroaryl.
In a preferred group of compounds of formula (I), A is selected from the group consisting of:

\ I \ \ I ~ ~O ~ I N~

' Q \i n - R9 R R n=0-6 R
n xR8a ~
n=0-6 n=0-6 /~ CI R~('~ n ~ N Ra n=0-6 R9 n=1-5 and pp R
5 wherein, R7 and R8 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of H, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl, -C02R13, -CONR13R14, fluoroalkyl, alkynyl, alkenyl, and cycloalkenyl, wherein said substituents on said R7 and R8 substituted groups are selected from the group consisting of:
a) cyano, b) -C02R13, c) -C(O)NR13R14, d) -S02NR13R14, e) -NO2, f) -CF3, g) -OR13, h) -NR13R14, I) -O(C=O)R13, j) -O(C=O)N R13R14, and k) halogen; and B is selected from the group consisting of:

R4 #R' R4 R6 R R
/ I
R3 \
RNN-N N~--NH
H Rio NH
Rio N-NH OH

\ \ I 3 OH OH OH ' R

and wherein R2 to R6 and R10 to R14 are as defined above.

More preferably, R7 and R8 are the same or different and are independently selected from H, alkyl, fluoroalkyl such as, -CF3 and -CF2CH3; cycloalkyl and cycloalkylalkyl such as, for example, methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopropylmethyl and cyclohexyl, and R9 is the same or different and is 1-3 moieties selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, -CF3, cyano, -OCH3, and -NO2;

B is selected from the group consisting of :1R6 \
R, `N_N, H

i R3 N, N N
N \
IZ

and wherein R2 is H, OH, -NHC(O)R13 or -NHSO2R13;
R3 is -S02NR13R14, -NO2, cyano, -C(O) NR13R14 , -S02R13; or -C(O)OR13;
R4 is H, -NO2, cyano, -CH3, halogen, or -CF3;
R5 is H, -CF3, -NO2, halogen or cyano;
R6 is H, alkyl or -CF3;

R10 and R11 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, -CF3, -NR13R14, -NR 13C(O)NR13R14, -C(O)OR13, -SH, -SO(t)NR13R14,-SO2R13, -NHC(O)R13, -NHSO2NR13R14, -NHS02R13, -C(O)NR13R14, -C(O)NR13OR14, -OC(O)R13, -COR13, -OR13, and cyano;
R13 and R14 are the same or different and are independently selected from methyl, ethyl and isopropyl; or R13 and R14 when taken together with the nitrogen they are attached to in the groups -NR 13R14, -C(O)NR13R14, -S02NR13R14, -OC(O)NR13R14, _CONR13R14, -NR13C(O)NR13R14, -SOtNR13R14, -NHS02NR13R14 preferably form an unsubstituted or substituted 3 to 7 membered, saturated heterocyclic ring optionally containing one additional heteroatom selected from 0, S or NR18wherein R18 is selected from H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -C(O)R'9, -S02R19 and -C(O)NR19R20, wherein R19 and R20 are the same or different and each is independently selected from alkyl, aryl and heteroaryl, wherein the substituents on the substituted cyclized R13 and R14 groups are the same or different and independently selected from 1 to 3 of alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, fluoroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, amino, -C(O)OR15, -C(O)NR15R16, -SOtNR15R16, -C(O)R15, -SO2R15, -NHC(O)NR15R16 and halogen, and wherein R15 and R16 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group, consisting of H, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heteroaryl;

Even more preferably, A is selected from the group consisting of.

N

VXy-, \~JN/O QR9 R

R7R8 R R 7 8 R~7(R8 /-O8a R7 R9 R8 ~S
n L R9 n=0-6 n=0-6 R9 and 0 Ni wherein, 5 R7 is H, fluoroalkyl, alkyl or cycloalkyl;
R8 is H, alkyl, -CF2CH3 or -CF3;
R9 is H, F, Cl, Br, alkyl or -CF3.

Still even more preferably, A is selected from the group consisting of '+y/xR8a R8 , and R$
wherein, R7 is H, -CF3, -CF2CH3, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl or t-butyl;
R8 is H;
R9 is H, F, Cl, Br, alkyl or -CF3, and B is:

or R
wherein:
R2 is H, OH, -NHC(O)R13 or -NHSO2R13;
R3 is -S02NR13R14, -NO2, cyano, -C(O) NR13R14 , -S02R13; or -C(O)OR13;
R4 is H, -NO2, cyano, -CH3 or -CF3;
R5 is H, -CF3, -NO2, halogen or cyano; and R6 is H, alkyl or -CF3;
R11 is H, halogen or alkyl; and R13 and R14 are the same or different and are independently methyl, ethyl or isopropyl; or R13 and R14 when taken together with the nitrogen they are attached to in the groups -NR13R14, -C(O)NR13R14, -S02NR13R14, -OC(O)NR13R14, -CONR13R14, -NR13C(O)NR13R14, -SOtNR13R14, _NHSO2NR13R14 preferably form an unsubstituted or substituted 3 to 7 membered, saturated heterocyclic ring optionally containing one additional heteroatom selected from 0, S or NR18wherein R18 is selected from H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -C(O)R19, -SO2R19 and -C(O)NR19R20, wherein R19 and R20 are the same or different and each is independently selected from alkyl, aryl and heteroaryl, wherein the substituents on the substituted cyclized R13 and R14 groups are the same or different and independently selected from 1 to 3 of alkyl, aryl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, arylalkyl, fluoroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, amino, -C(O)OR15, -C(O)NR15R16, -SOtNR15R16, -C(O)R15, -S02R15, -NHC(O)NR15R16 and halogen, and wherein R15 and R16 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heteroaryl;

io Yet even still more preferred, A is selected from the group consisting of R7 R8 R7 R8 R7 R$
01--- \--~qs %O

i X `R8a R8 and R8 and B is:

or R
wherein:
R2 is H, OH, -NHC(O)R13 or -NHSO2R13;
R3 is -S02NR13R14, -C(O)NR13R14, -S02R13, -NO2 or cyano;
R4 is H, -NO2, -CF3, -CH3 or cyano, R5 is H, halogen, -NO2, cyano or -CF3;
R6 is H, -CF3 or alkyl, R7 is H, -CF3, -CF2CH3, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl or t-butyl;

R8 is H;
R9 is H, F, Cl, Br, alkyl, cycloalkyl or -CF3;
R11 is H, halogen or alkyl; and R13 and R14 are independently methyl or ethyl.
Most preferably, A is selected from the group consisting of O
ci O O
I/ I I

Br CI , Br \ I \ = I \ F

S IS
DIZ

O O S
I I/ /

CF3 CF3 CF3 0, ~/

~S/ 610//

S o to / I/ /
and and B is I
or R
1:/

wherein, R2 is -OH;
R3 is -S02NR13R14 or -CONR13R14 ;
s R4 is H, -CH3 or -CF3;
R5 is H or cyano;
R6 is H, -CH3 or -CF3;
R11 is H, and R13 and R14 are methyl.
Representative embodiments of this invention are described below. The embodiments have been numbered for purposes of reference thereto.
Embodiment No. 1 is directed to the methods of treatment described above using formula I, except the compounds used are those of formula IA:

- (IA) BAN N_A
H H

and their pharmaceutically acceptable salts (e.g., sodium or calcium salt) and solvates thereof, wherein:
A is selected from the group consisting of:
(1) N
N I
N
R~ R8 R7 R8 R7 R8 0 ` N"0 N

NCO L I / /

O
R8 Rs X
X

X ---Ol ~O S

S

e.g., `L.

I e.g., N \ I \ \
NON N N

c 'I i I N
N N=/

X N
and (2) I \ c,~ I ~ N c7 I N

R7 Rs R7 Rs R7 Rs O
NCO ~ I N\
N\ L ( / /
O

R7 R8 R7 Rs R7 R 8 R7 R 8 S r-0 ~0 2,)& -NH

17 -0 R7 R8 S R7 Rs /
1n n , x x x Rs R8 Rs --o I / R7 Rs p ~
N x(~
(R8 N
NJ

R7 Rs R7 Rs R7 Rs ~0 \i~S N
N iN
N
z and R8 Rs wherein the above rings of said A groups are substituted with I to 6 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups;
(3) O S~

O

R7 R$ R7 R$

O S

N N

and e.g., wherein one or both of the above rings of said A groups are substituted with I
to 6 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups;
(4) O and O
O-~' R8 O~ R9 wherein the above phenyl rings of said A groups are substituted with 1 to 3 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups; and (5) N O N\
/ ~ O I />R9 \ / S
N N, N ~N
R9 ' R9 \ R8 8.
N, R9 N -N O

N and R9 ~R14 n B is selected from the group consisting of \I 3 R
N~ N
RN-N\ \NH H

R11 \ R11 \ I R3 NH
N-NH OH

I'll N N
y , S
i,/

R1 2 R10 / N/\ N
N R3 3 )~N

R3 3 R3 ~ N I
R

OH OH

N and R3 nis0to6; pis1to5; XisO,NH,orS; Zis1to3;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, OH, -C(O)OH, -SH, -S02NR13R14, -NHC(O)R13, -NHSO2NR13R14, -NHSO2R13 , -NR13R14, -C(O)NR13R14, -C(O)NHOR13, -C(O)NR13OH, - S(02)OH, -OC(O)R13, an unsubstituted heterocyclic acidic functional group, and a substituted heterocyclic acidic functional group; wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted heterocyclic acidic functional group each substituent being independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups;
each R3 and R4 is independently selected from the group consisting of:
hydrogen, cyano, halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, -OH, -CF3, -OCF3, -NO2, -C(O)R13, -C(O)OR13, -C(O)NHR17, -C(O)NR13R14, -SO(t)NR13R14, -SO(t)R13, -C(O)NR13OR14, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, R31 R13 N ,OR13 F_R31 R14 It F11 I and C-1 R14 O R30 -' N

wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted aryl group and each substitutent is independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups; and wherein there are I to 6 substituents on said substituted heteroaryl group and each substitutent is independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups;
each R5 and R6 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, -CF3, -OCF3, -NO2, -C(O)R13, -C(O)OR13, -C(O)NR13R14, -SO(t~NR13R14, -C(O)NR13OR14, cyano, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl group;
wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted aryl group and each substitutent is independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups; and wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted heteroaryl group and each substitutent is independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups;
each R7 and R8 is independently selected from the group consisting of. H, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl, -C02R13, -CONR13R14, alkynyl, alkenyl, and cycloalkenyl;
and wherein there are one or more (e.g., 1 to 6) substituents on said substituted R7 and R8 groups, wherein each substitutent is independently selected from the group consisting of:
a) halogen, b) -CF3, c) -COR13, d) -OR13, e) -NR13R14, f) -NO2, g) -CN, h) -S020R13, i) -Si(alkyl)3, wherein each alkyl is independently selected, j) -Si(aryl)3, wherein each alkyl is independently selected, k) -(R13)2R14Si, wherein each R13 is independently selected, I) -C02R13, m) -C(O)NR13R14, n) -S02NR13R14, O) -SO2R13, p) -OC(O)R13, q) -OC(O)NR13R14, r) -NR 13C(O)R14 , and s) -NR 13C02R14;
(fluoroalkyl is one non-limiting example of an alkyl group that is subsituted with halogen);
R8a is selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl and cycloalkylalkyl;
each R9 is independently selected from the group consisting of:
a) -R13 b) halogen, c) -CF3, d) -COR13, e) -OR13, f) -NR13R14, g) -NO2, h) -CN, i) -S02R13, j) -S02NR13R14, k) -NRI3COR14, 5 I) -CONR13R14 , m) -NR13C02R14, n) -C02R13, o) N 7~,- N~
NH
p) alkyl substituted with one or more (e.g., one) -OH groups (e.g., -(CH2)gOH, wherein q is 1-6, usually 1 to 2, and preferably 1), q) alkyl substituted with one or more (e.g., one) -NR13R14 group (e.g., -(CH2)gNR13R14, wherein q is 1-6, usually 1 to 2, and preferably 1), and r) -N(R13)S02R14 (e.g., R13 is H and R14 is alkyl, such as methyl);
each R10 and R11 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl (e.g., C1 to C6, such as methyl), halogen, -CF3, -OCF3, -NR13R14, -NR13C(O)NR13R14, -OH, -C(O)OR 13, -SH, -SO(t)NR13R14, -SO2R13, -NHC(O)R13, -NHS02NR13R14, -NHS02R13, -C(O)NR13R14, -C(O)NR13OR14, -OC(O)R13 and cyano;
R12 is selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, -C(O)OR13, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl group; wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on the substituted R12 groups and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups;
each R13 and R14 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocyclic, unsubstituted or substituted fluoroalkyl, and unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkylalkyl (wherein "heterocyloalkyl" means heterocyclic); wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted R13 and R14 groups and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, -CF3, -OH, alkoxy, aryl, arylalkyl, fluroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, -N(R40)2, -C(O)OR15, -C(O)NR15R16 -S(O)tNR15R16, -C(O)R15, -SO2R15 provided that R15 is not H, halogen, and -NHC(O)NR15R16; or R13 and R14 taken together with the nitrogen they are attached to in the groups -NR13R14, -C(O)NR13R14, -S02NR13R14, -OC(O)NR13R14, -CONR13R14, -NR13C(O)NR13R14, -SOtNR13R14, -NHSO2NR13R14 form an unsubstituted or substituted saturated heterocyclic ring (preferably a 3 to 7 membered heterocyclic ring), said ring optionally containing one additional heteroatom selected from the group consisting of: 0, S and NR18; wherein there are 1 to 3 substituents on the substituted cyclized R13 and R14 groups (i.e., there is 1 to 3 substituents on the ring formed when the R13 and R14 groups are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are bound) and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, aryl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, arylalkyl, fluoroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, amino, -C(O)OR15, -C(O)NR15R16, -SOtNR15R16, -C(O)R15, -S02R15 provided that R15 is not H, -NHC(O)NR15R16, -NHC(O)OR15, halogen, and a heterocylcoalkenyl group (i.e., a heterocyclic group that has at least one, and preferably one, double bond in a ring, e.g., N H
N

each R15 and R16 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heteroaryl;
R17 is selected from the group consisting of: -S02alkyl, -SO2aryl, -S02cycloalkyl, and -S02heteroaryl;
R18 is selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -C(O)R19, -S02R19 and -C(O)NR19R20;

each R19 and R20 is independently selected from the group consisting of:
alkyl, aryl and heteroaryl;
R30 is selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, cycloalkyl, -CN, -NO2, or -S02R15 provided that R15 is not H;
each R31 is independently selected from the group consisting of: unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl and unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl; wherein there are 1 to substituents on said substituted R31 groups and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups;
each R40 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl and cycloalkyl; and t is 0, 1 or 2.
In Embodiment No. 1, at least one (e.g., 1 to 3, and usually one) compound of formula IA are used.
Embodiment No. 2 is directed to the use of at least one (e.g., I to 3, and usually 1) compound of formula IA for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of the diseases described above in the methods of treatment using formula 1.
Embodiment No. 3 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is selected from the group consisting of:

(1) ::)~

wherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of: -C(O)NR13R14, P-R31 R14, II
)I and C" 14 R30 -' N

and all other substituents are as defined for formula I or IA;
(2) R \N'N

wherein all substituents are as defined for formula I or IA;
(3) wherein all substituents are as defined for formula I or IA;
(4) NON

wherein all substituents are as defined for formula I or IA;
(5) N

wherein all substituents are as defined for formula I or IN
(6) )~N

wherein all substituents are as defined for formula I or IN and (7) S

wherein all substituents are as defined for formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 4 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

R4 42, R3 5 Rwherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of: -C(O)NR13R14, R31 R13 ,OR 13 N
I__R31 R14i II
If I and C" 14 and all other substituents are as defined in formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 5 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

R3 is -C(O)NR13R14, and all other substituents are as defined in formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 6 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is / I

R3 \

R3 is -C(O)NR13R14, R13 and R14 are each the same or different alkyl group, and all other substituents are as defined in formula I or IA .
Embodiment No. 7 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is RR2 is -OH, R3 is -C(O)NR13R14, R13 and R14 are each the same or different alkyl group, and all other substituents are as defined in formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 8 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is R

R3 is selected from the group consisting of:

N
F_R31 R14~ N I I
Fli I and CII 14 0 R30~N R
and all other substituents are as defined in formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 9 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is R4 41R:e R

3 10 RR3 is selected from the group consisting of:

hR 31 N13 N ,OR13 R 14/ I and R30 N

R2 is -OH, and all other substituents are as defined in formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 10 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

N \
R14' 15 0 R2 R2, R13, and R14 are as defined for compounds of formula I or IA, and all other substituents are as defined in formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 11 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

,N P
R14y R2 is -OH, R13 and R14 are as defined for compounds of formula I or IA, and all other substituents are as defined in formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 12 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

R14" N Py R2 is as defined for compounds of formula I or IA, R13 and R14 are the same or different alkyl group, and all other substituents areas defined for compounds of formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 13 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

\
R14" N O R2 R2 is -OH, R13 and R14 are the same or different alkyl group, and all other substituents areas defined for compounds of formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 14 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is is as described in Embodiment No. 8, R4 is H, R5 is H, R6 is H, and all other substituents areas defined for compounds of formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 15 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is is as described in Embodiment No. 9, R4 is H, R5 is H, R6 is H, and all other substituents areas defined for compounds of formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 16 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in Embodiments Nos. 6, 7, 10 and 11, except that R13 and R14 are each methyl, and all other substituents are as defined in formula I or IA.

. ............ -----Embodiment No. 17 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is selected from the group consisting of:

R \N'\ S I N

R1 \ R10 R10 N
N I H
R3 and R3 wherein all substituents are as defined for formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 18 of this invention is directed to compounds of formula IA
wherein B is:

S

Rs wherein all substituents are as defined for formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 19 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

S

R11 is H, and all other substituents are as defined in formula I or IA.
1s Embodiment No. 20 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

S

R2 is -OH, and all other substituents are as defined in formula I or IA.

Embodiment No. 21 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

S

R3 1314is -C(O)NRR, and all other substituents are as defined in formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 22 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

S

R3 is -S(O)tNR13R14 (e.g., t is 2), and all other substituents are as defined in formula I
or IA.
Embodiment No. 23 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

j4-R2 is -OH, R3 is -C(O)NR13R14, and all other substituents are as defined in formula I
or IA.
Embodiment No. 24 of this invention is directed to compounds of formula IA
wherein B is:

S

j R2 is -OH, and R3 is -S(O)tNR13R14 (e.g., t is 2), and all other substituents are as defined in formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 25 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

S

j R2 is -OH, R3 is -C(O)NR13R14, R11 is H, and all other substituents are as defined in formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 26 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

S

R
j R2 is -OH, R3 is -S(O)tNR13R14 (e.g., t is 2), R11 is H, and all other substituents are as defined in formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 27 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

S

R2 is -OH, R3 is -C(O)NR13R14, R11 is H, and R13 and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of. alkyl, unsubstituted heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl, and all other substituents are as defined in formula I or IA. In general, one of R13 or R is alkyl (e.g., methyl). An example of a substituted heteroaryl group is O,N
Embodiment No. 28 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

j4-R2 is -OH, R3 is -S(O)tNR13R14 (e.g., t is 2), R11 is H, and R13 and R14 are the same or alkyl group (e.g., methyl), and all other substituents are as defined in formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 29 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

S

and all substituents are as defined in formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 30 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 3 to 29, and A is as defined in all of the 5 preferred descriptions above for A in formula I, or A is as described for formula IA.
Embodiment No. 31 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 3 to 29, and A is:

wherein the furan ring is unsubstituted or substitued as described in the definition of A
10 for formula I or IA, and all other substitutents are as defined for formula IA.
Embodiment No. 32 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 3 to 29, and A is /
v wherein the furan ring is substituted and all other substituents are as defined for 15 formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 33 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 3 to 29,and A is v wherein the furan ring is substituted with at least one (e.g., 1 to 3, or 1 to 2) alkyl 20 group and all other substituents are as defined for formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 34 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 3 to 29, A is '`ss v wherein the furan ring is substituted with one alkyl group and all other substituents are as defined for formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 35 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 3 to 29, and A is R~ R$
v wherein the furan ring is substituted with one C1 to C3 alkyl group (e.g., methyl or isopropyl), and all other substituents are as defined for formula I or IA.
Embodiment No. 36 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is as io described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 3 to 29, and A is RS
as defined in any one of the Embodiment Nos.31 to 35, except that R7 and R8 are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of: H and alkyl.
Embodiment No. 37 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 3 to 29, and A is v as defined in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 31 to 35, except that R7 is H, and R8 is alkyl (e.g., ethyl or t-butyl).
Embodiment No. 38 is directed to any one of the Embodiment Nos. 3 to 37 wherein the compound of formula IA is a pharmaceutically acceptable salt.
Embodiment No. 39 is directed to any one of the Embodiment Nos. 3 to 37 wherein the compound of formula IA is a sodium salt.
Embodiment No. 40 is directed to any one of the Embodiment Nos. 3 to 37 wherein the compound of formula IA is a calcium salt.

Embodiment No. 41 is directed to a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of any one of the representative compounds of this invention.
Embodiment No. 42 is directed to a sodium salt of any one of the representative compounds of this invention.
Embodiment No. 43 is directed to a calcium salt of any one of the representative compounds of this invention.
Embodiment No. 44 is directed to a pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one (e.g., 1 to 3, usually 1) compound of formula IA as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 3 to 43 in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
Embodiment No. 45 is directed to a method of treating any one of the diseases described above comprising administering to a patient in need of such treatment an effective amount (e.g., a therapeutically effective amount) of a compound of formula IA as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 3 to 43. The diseases referred to in this embodiment are those described in the methods of treatment using compounds of formula I.
Embodiment No. 46 is directed to the use of a compound of formula IA as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 3 to 43 for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment any one of the diseases described above. The diseases referred in this embodiment are those described in the methods of treatment using compounds of formula I.

Representative compounds of the invention include but are not limited to:
O O O O

N S
N N N N-' O OH H H I/ O OH H H

O O O O
~
)Y9NNX(F
. ILL, ~ItN O OH H H O OH H

F

't, ~N ,N I N N S
N
O OH H O OH H H

\ O O / ,N I N S

O (/ ) 0 OH
N OH H H

N N
OH H H 0 OH H H l i N O\ NI
N N \
NJj, N

OO

ON N
I N N
N N I O HO H
O OH H H

--N~N H H O S`N N H H "'O
OH O OH

o 0 o / ~ )~ I
O N N N H N'~~ 01"
O n O OH

p O F 0 0 I ~ _ F F ~ ):~
i O ,~ N N S -N~ e' N N
OH H H I ~N OH H H /
O \
O O / O O

N N'~ N I \O , N I I

-IN I Jj~ O C) -N~ N N
O HO H N ~N OH H H /\
O
O O O O /

HON
N / N N \
p OH H H/ F 0 OH H H I ~-F F O O

O 0 N N/ N ):~
Nb H O OH H O O qN O O

~ ~ p "'N 1 ):~ N
1: / 0 OH H H I

O

HO O O / 0 "DN I N N' 1/ N N

0 HO H H\ ~N 0 OH H 0 O O O O
N / I ~
N N N N W"' O O O O
N p - I ~
N N ~N N N

O O cccc ):~ "I
I 'l, O OH H H 0 OH H H
O O
1 , O O ~ qN ):~ N
N I I I
N N\ 0 OH H H
O OH H H

O O O
"IN I N N~ -IN N N

O O O O
N N

O O O O
--rqN N N
Yt:?''o 0 OH H H~ N N

F
O
N S N/ N
,N", OH H H \ OH H H
O
O O

N N I i~~0 I
O OH H H I~ N

~N N IN N)Z~N
o OH H H O HO H H
H2N q ar~ N N -('S\
O OH H N N O OH H H

\
H.N N ):~ N ~N N \/ N ~N b 0 OH H H~ fOHH \
O O p ~
N N

O o ~~ o 07 y q s N N J'qN):~N

F

p p O O

H
H H
O O O O
-Irq , 'Ll, N N 'IN
N N~~

O O O O
~N LNNCOH N N?\

O O O OH
N I ,N y~x O

O O O O
eo N qN
N N

O O O O
N I
N N N N
y li O O O O
N ~I "IN ~I
N N N I
O OH H H ~ 0 OH H H

O O O O
J-J, yq , ):~ ,N
N
N N IN N

O O O O
N / N
/ O OH 'N'U'N 1:: L N N

N ~ 0\--/ O O O
I

O O N

O OH H H / N
N \ I N N I\ / O O
N O 0 OH H H !/

/ O O N

N I - O O
N
O OH H H ,N N N
O OH H H
N
I
O O O
N
N N =
N N-'\ yjl:: I I

H H OH H H

O O O O

N N I /IN N N xclo/,~

O O H qN O O
H (N N
N ):~ N"o O O OH O O SOH
'---'r O O O O
f,."OIN
N N N

O
N H NOH H H O O
PO H H
O
O
I O \
yc:?-- N
O HO H H OH , O O
'L~ N`

N N-\

O O
N\ - N N .
N
H

O O O

QN'm N +/, _ ~N OH H H I 0 OH H H p O
O O
O O O

~N I N N O N N ~1 N N \
O /
OH H H O pH H

O O O O
N q O
N /q N '0 N N
N N H Fi \ 0 OH H H
O OH
O O I , I O O

O ):~ N H

N N N
O OH H H O OH H H O /\
O Off/ O O
i )~ IF
,N O "IN N- H
N ):~ H 0 OH H H ~N \
O OH H , p / O O I O O
,,N H
N H
N. y N )Z~N
O OH H H p O OH H H p O O O O
p N
N N
N N7~ yj::

- I ~1/

O O~ O O

)(9NNYNH2 O OH H H0 0 OH H H

O O O O
N
O N H os, O OH H H
,.,IN," OH H

O O O O
I ):~
~-Jj, N N N ,N I N N
O OH H H I/ O HO H H l i O O O O

O
~N I N N H
N
O OH H H \ iN H Ff O

N rq 'W, O O O N O O
O N
J:I~
N
N
H H~ OH H H l i OH
N O O
;N O O N l "yJ;
N N
N N~\ O OH H H I

O O O O
WP-N N'`N
N iN N
OH H H

O OH

p O O O N,N O O
N,N
'N
--N N N \
HO N N/\ HO H H I
H H

N O O

O O O I/ N N S
N \ I OH H H
N N-\
N
O OH H H O F
F-- L-F
O O
N
N O I
N ):~ S
N \ ti N
N OH H H
O HO H H
O
O O O
iN N N O> nN'\ N1 f N NO OH H H //O N H H
OH
O- O
O O
O O
O
_N N \~ N N- N N O
O OH H H O OH H H

O O O O
^ 1 s N N
N / N
N
pH H H ON H H
OH

N I I O
N N / IN N I/
O OH H H O OH H H

~N N N ' S, Yl( N
O OH H H N ):~ N-\
O OH H H

N N'~

O OH H H

O
O O /
N
,N ( - ( IN S
N N N N

O O

N O
O OH H H J
O O

O O

O
N N

N
N

O N N I HO H H

OS\ N N O
O OH H H

O 0 S ;

S~ \ N N 0 O O OH H H

Preferred compounds of the invention include:

N N N
~N `OH H H 0 OH H H
O
O O/ / I O O /
N S N
N N N

O O O O
~: N
N N N N
N-N, H H 0 OH H H
H

O O I , I O O
-. S loo, N N ):t N S

O OH H H

O O
O I N- N S
YIP-- N N,! N , / O OH H H I/
O OH H H
O O
O O
N
S I N N QO/
O HO H H
O OH H IO/
O O O
N , I): S
N ( .~ O N N
0 HO H H ` ~ 0 OH 1-i H

O O, O O

N N IIN
0 OH H H I, N N

0\1--/O O O
N
q- '0 N N ~ N N
OHO HiH \__/N OH H H /
O
O O O OF F
N N is N F
~
I --\(D N N S
O OH H H ~
N OH H H

O O O O
O
N N/ N N N
yq I
IIN", OH H H O OH H H ' O O
O OD /
N ,N ):c N~
N E N N

F
O O O O
I ~1 - 0 N N
0 OH H H \ ~N OH H
O
O O
F
A
i ,N I F
'N/--\ QThN r ~N H H N N F
O OH / 0 OH H H 1 i O O O O
I,X

N~ N H H/ O,S N N H HV-~ OH OH

q O OH H H l i > /N 0 OH H H
01\1---/O / 0 0 N N O N N
N
lj:;~ " Y

N OH H H
O / O O

N
CNYrLC
O OH H O OH H

, O O/ I / I O O
O
-N N N
v N N O OH H H

O O
)YLNNXTF Y'C: N ( Z~N Q\
0 OH H H i 0 OH H H
F O O
O O N
y c: ? N N J)y ~N N N'J'J, O OH H H
yl:;~ I I

O O N

"IN YPLN - O O
I
0 HO H H ,N N

O O O O

Jj, N N'~ 1 N):~N
/ O OH H
H / 0 OH H H~
N
\\ 11 p N,N 0 O

NN N-HO H H N N~
O OH H H

p N,N O O O C~\
--N O N -HO H \ N/ NN
O_ ~s O O H H H
O O

N N O
_N OH H H O y N )Zt N'-"*Yjl/
OH H H
O
O O O O
N
/ N ,N
N N N , y ?
~N O OH H H 0 OH H H I
O O O
O
Jj, N N N N

N
I I
O O p O
,,N y N N

N N
O O / O O

'N N N ,N kNI
' N N^

O O O
N S N N

i H H
O O
Ov /N P ~ I -N N IRS. , r Y-L I I iN
O HO H H li O OHH
O
O O O O/ F
O ,N IN --, >

O 0 O OF-L .
N N O N N-S
O HO H iO N%% OH Fi H

O O CN O
0) N Nj~', N I/ N

o / O O
N N 1 N N\ O %
OH N N S
o N\ OH H H
Ho = H /

,N I O
N N

O O

N N
O OH H H
O O
N N

O O
N S
N =
p N O

O HO H H
O O
S
O S\ N N O
O OH H H

A more preferred group of compounds includes:

O O O O F
F F
~N I N N
-'o ):t O \ S
O OH H H/ N N
~N*~ OH H H
O O

NNN N O
O OH H N N
O OH H H
O
,,( - 0 0 i N
N N--~ - F
O OH H H O N N
~N~ OH H H
O O / O O
N /' N N-\ ~N
"r'( O OH H H O OH H

CN O O /
O N I i ~,N 4 0 OH H H
O OH H H
O O CN
O O ~
N I I
~ N N O N .LL
O OH H N N
O OH H H

~,N N ~,N N N
H O HO H O OH H l i H O

O O
N i S
N N 1 _-N N N S

o 0 0 0 )~ = \,O
~N~N N H H/ O S`N N H H
o OH 0 OH

Ho 0 HO
N
0 o II

On 1 N H H I/ N \ I Ld, i\
~ ~ o H N N
Ho 0 OH H H
O O
iN O
N N
O OH H H
O O

O
N N

q O O
iN z O
Y ) /

N N N N I
eq,\\

H
HO H

o S\ N N O
O H H H

A most preferred group of compounds includes:

/N \ N N I\ /N N N

N N N /N N N

O O O O
/N \ N N \ /N \ N N

O O

/N \ I N N 0 N

/N \ N O N~ /N \ N N
I I y 5 0 OH H H 0 OH H H

O O

iN ? O
N N
O OH H H

O O
q N N O
iN Y
O OH H H

N
O
N N
O OH H H

N S

N N ~10 O HO H H

O 0 S =

~S" N N 0 O O OH H H

Certain compounds of the invention may exist in different stereoisomeric forms (e.g., enantiomers, diastereoisomers and atropisomers). The invention contemplates all such stereoisomers both in pure form and in admixture, including racemic mixtures.
Isomers can be prepared using conventional methods.
Certain compounds will be acidic in nature, e.g. those compounds which possess a carboxyl or phenolic hydroxyl group. These compounds may form 5 pharmaceutically acceptable salts. Examples of such salts may include sodium, potassium, calcium, aluminum, gold and silver salts. Also contemplated are salts formed with pharmaceutically acceptable amines such as ammonia, alkyl amines, hydroxyalkylamines, N-methylglucamine and the like.
Certain basic compounds also form pharmaceutically acceptable salts, e.g., io acid addition salts. For example, the pyrido-nitrogen atoms may form salts with strong acid, while compounds having basic substituents such as amino groups also form salts with weaker acids. Examples of suitable acids for salt formation are hydrochloric, sulfuric, phosphoric, acetic, citric, oxalic, malonic, salicylic, malic, fumaric, succinic, ascorbic, maleic, methanesulfonic and other mineral and carboxylic acids well known 15 to those skilled in the art. The salts are prepared by contacting the free base form with a sufficient amount of the desired acid to produce a salt in the conventional manner. The free base forms may be regenerated by treating the salt with a suitable dilute aqueous base solution such as dilute aqueous NaOH, potassium carbonate, ammonia and sodium bicarbonate. The free base forms differ from their respective 20 salt forms somewhat in certain physical properties, such as solubility in polar solvents, but the acid and base salts are otherwise equivalent to their respective free base forms for purposes of the invention.
All such acid and base salts are intended to be pharmaceutically acceptable salts within the scope of the invention and all acid and base salts are considered 25 equivalent to the free forms of the corresponding compounds for purposes of the invention.
Compounds of formula I or IA can exist in unsolvated and solvated forms, including hydrated forms. In general, the solvated forms, with pharmaceutically acceptable solvents such as water, ethanol and the like, are equivalent to the 30 unsolvated forms for the purposes of this invention.
In a preferred embodiment, a compound of formula (1) or IA is combined with one of the following antineoplastic agents: gemcitabine, paclitaxel (Taxol ), Fluorourcil (5-FU), cyclophosphamide (Cytoxan ), temozolomide, or Vincristine.

In another preferred embodiment, the present invention provides a method of treating cancer, comprising administering, concurrently or sequentially, and effective amount of a compound of formula (1) or IA and a microtubule affecting agent e.g., paclitaxel.
For preparing pharmaceutical compositions from the compounds described by this invention, inert, pharmaceutically acceptable carriers can be either solid or liquid.
Solid form preparations include powders, tablets, dispersible granules, capsules, cachets and suppositories. The powders and tablets may be comprised of from about 5 to about 95 percent active ingredient. Suitable solid carriers are known in the art, e.g., magnesium carbonate, magnesium stearate, talc, sugar or lactose.
Tablets, powders, cachets and capsules can be used as solid dosage forms suitable for oral administration. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and methods of manufacture for various compositions may be found in A. Gennaro (ed.), Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th Edition, (1990), Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pennsylvania.
Liquid form preparations include solutions, suspensions and emulsions. As an example may be mentioned water or water-propylene glycol solutions for parenteral injection or addition of sweeteners and opacifiers for oral solutions, suspensions and emulsions. Liquid form preparations may also include solutions for intranasal administration.
Aerosol preparations suitable for inhalation may include solutions and solids in powder form, which may be in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, such as an inert compressed gas, e.g. nitrogen.
Also included are solid form preparations which are intended to be converted, shortly before use, to liquid form preparations for either oral or parenteral administration. Such liquid forms include solutions, suspensions and emulsions.
The compounds of the invention may also be deliverable transdermally. The transdermal composition can take the form of creams, lotions, aerosols and/or emulsions and can be included in a transdermal patch of the matrix or reservoir type as are conventional in the art for this purpose.
Preferably the compound is administered orally.
Preferably, the pharmaceutical preparation is in a unit dosage form. In such form, the preparation is subdivided into suitably sized unit doses containing appropriate quantities of the active component, e.g., an effective amount to achieve the desired purpose.
The quantity of active compound in a unit dose of preparation may be varied or adjusted from about 0.01 mg to about 1000 mg, preferably from about 0.01 mg to about 750 mg, more preferably from about 0.01 mg to about 500 mg, and most preferably from about 0.01 mg to about 250 mg, according to the particular application.
The actual dosage employed may be varied depending upon the requirements of the patient and the severity of the condition being treated. Determination of the proper dosage regimen for a particular situation is within the skill of the art. For convenience, the total dosage may be divided and administered in portions during the day as required.
The amount and frequency of administration of the compounds of the invention and/or the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof will be regulated according to the judgment of the attending clinician considering such factors as age, condition and size of the patient as well as severity of the symptoms being treated. A typical recommended daily dosage regimen for oral administration can range from about 0.04 mg/day to about 4000 mg/day, in two to four divided doses.
Another aspect of the invention is a method treating cancer, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof, concurrently or sequentially, a therapeutically effective amount of (a) a compound of formula (I) or IA and (b) an atineoplastic agent, microtubule affecting agent or anti-angiogenesis agent.
Classes of compounds that can be used as the chemotherapeutic agent (antineoplastic agent) include: alkylating agents, anti metabolites, natural products and their derivatives, hormones and steroids (including synthetic analogs), and synthetics.
Examples of compounds within these classes are given below.
Alkylating agents (including nitrogen mustards, ethylenimine derivatives, alkyl sulfonates, nitrosoureas and triazenes): Uracil mustard, Chlormethine, Cyclophosphamide (Cytoxan ), Ifosfamide, Meiphalan, Chlorambucil, Pipobroman, Triethylene-melamine, Triethylenethiophosphoramine, Busulfan, Carmustine, Lomustine, Streptozocin, Dacarbazine, and Temozolomide.
Antimetabolites (including folic acid antagonists, pyrimidine analogs, purine s analogs and adenosine deaminase inhibitors): Methotrexate, 5-Fluorouracil, Floxuridine, Cytarabine, 6-Mercaptopurine, 6-Thioguanine, Fludarabine phosphate, Pentostatine, and Gemcitabine.
Natural products and their derivatives (including vinca alkaloids, antitumor antibiotics, enzymes, lymphokines and epipodophyllotoxins): Vinblastine, Vincristine, Vindesine, Bleomycin, Dactinomycin, Daunorubicin, Doxorubicin, Epirubicin, idarubicin, paclitaxel (paclitaxel is commercially available as Taxol and is described in more detail below in the subsection entitled Microtubule Affecting Agents"), Mithramycin, Deoxyco-formycin, Mitomycin-C, L-Asparaginase, Interferons (especially IFN-a), Etoposide, and Teniposide.
Hormones and steroids (including synthetic analogs): 17a-Ethinylestradiol, Diethylstilbestrol, Testosterone, Prednisone, Fluoxymesterone, Dromostanolone propionate, Testolactone, Megestrolacetate, Tamoxifen, Methylprednisolone, Methyl-testosterone, Prednisolone, Trlamcinolone, Chlorotrianisene, Hydroxyprogesterone, Aminoglutethimide, Estramustine, Medroxyprogesteroneacetate, Leuprolide, Flutamide, Toremifene, Zoladex.
Synthetics (including inorganic complexes such as platinum coordination complexes): Cisplatin, Carboplatin, Hydroxyurea, Amsacrine, Procarbazine, Mitotane, Mitoxantrone, Levamisole, and Hexamethylmelamine.
Methods for the safe and effective administration of most of these chemotherapeutic agents are known to those skilled in the art. In addition, their administration is described in the standard literature. For example, the administration of many of the chemotherapeutic agents is described in the "Physicians' Desk Reference" (PDR), e.g., 2002 edition (Medical Economics Company, Montvale, NJ
07645-1742, USA).
As used herein, a microtubule affecting agent is a compound that interferes with cellular mitosis, i.e., having an anti-mitotic effect, by affecting microtubule formation and/or action. Such agents can be, for instance, microtubule stabilizing agents or agents that disrupt microtubule formation.
Microtubule affecting agents useful in the invention are well known to those of skill in the art and include, but are not limited to allocolchicine (NSC
406042), Halichondrin B (NSC 609395), colchicine (NSC 757), colchicine derivatives (e.g., NSC
33410), dolastatin 10 (NSC 376128), maytansine (NSC 153858), rhizoxin (NSC
332598), paclitaxel (Taxol , NSC 125973), Taxol derivatives (e.g., derivatives (e.g., NSC 608832), thiocolchicine (NSC 361792), trityl cysteine (NSC 83265), vinblastine sulfate (NSC 49842), vincristine sulfate (NSC 67574), epothilone A, epothilone, and discodermolide (see Service, (1996) Science, 274:2009) estramustine, nocodazole, MAP4, and the like. Examples of such agents are also described in the scientific and patent literature, see, e.g., Bulinski (1997) J. Cell Sci. 110:3055-3064;
Panda (1997) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 94:10560-10564; Muhlradt (1997) Cancer Res. 57:3344-3346; Nicolaou (1997) Nature 387:268-272; Vasquez (1997) Mot. Biol. Cell.
8:973-i5 985; Panda (1996) J. Biol. Chem. 271:29807-29812.
Particularly preferred agents are compounds with paclitaxel-like activity.
These include, but are not limited to paclitaxel and paclitaxel derivatives (paclitaxel-like compounds) and analogues. Paclitaxel and its derivatives are available commercially.
In addition, methods of making paclitaxel and paclitaxel derivatives and analogues are well known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos:
5,569,729;
5,565,478; 5,530,020; 5,527,924; 5,508,447; 5,489,589; 5,488,116; 5,484,809;
5,478,854; 5,478,736; 5,475,120; 5,468,769; 5,461,169; 5,440,057; 5,422,364;
5,411,984; 5,405,972; and 5,296,506).
More specifically, the term "paclitaxel" as used herein refers to the drug commercially available as Taxol (NSC number: 125973). Taxol inhibits eukaryotic cell replication by enhancing polymerization of tubulin moieties into stabilized microtubule bundles that are unable to reorganize into the proper structures for mitosis. Of the many available chemotherapeutic drugs, paclitaxel has generated interest because of its efficacy in clinical trials against drug-refractory tumors, including ovarian and mammary gland tumors (Hawkins (1992) Oncology, 6: 17-23, Horwitz (1992) Trends Pharmacol. Sci. 13: 134-146, Rowinsky (1990) J. Natl.
Canc.
Inst. 82: 1247-1259).

Additional microtubule affecting agents can be assessed using one of many such assays known in the art, e.g., a semiautomated assay which measures the tubulin-polymerizing activity of paclitaxel analogs in combination with a cellular assay to measure the potential of these compounds to block cells In mitosis (see Lopes 5 (1997) Cancer Chemother. Pharmacol. 41:37-47).
Generally, activity of a test compound is determined by contacting a cell with that compound and determining whether or not the cell cycle is disrupted, in particular, through the inhibition of a mitotic event. Such inhibition may be mediated by disruption of the mitotic apparatus, e.g., disruption of normal spindle formation. Cells 10 in which mitosis is interrupted may be characterized by altered morphology (e.g., microtubule compaction, increased chromosome number, etc.).
In a preferred embodiment, compounds with possible tubulin polymerization activity are screened in vitro. In a preferred embodiment, the compounds are screened against cultured WR21 cells (derived from line 69-2 wap-ras mice) for 15 inhibition of proliferation and/or for altered cellular morphology, in particular for microtubule compaction. In vivo screening of positive-testing compounds can then be performed using nude mice bearing the WR21 tumor cells. Detailed protocols for this screening method are described by Porter (1995) Lab. Anim. Sc!., 45(2):145-150.
Other methods of screening compounds for desired activity are well known to 20 those of skill in the art. Typically such assays involve assays for inhibition of microtubule assembly and/or disassembly. Assays for microtubule assembly are described, for example, by Gaskin et at (1974) J. Molec. Biol., 89: 737-758.
U.S.
Patent No. 5,569,720 also provides in vitro and in vivo assays for compounds with paclitaxel-like activity.
25 Methods for the safe and effective administration of the above-mentioned microtubule affecting agents are known to those skilled in the art. In addition, their administration is described in the standard literature. For example, the administration of many of the chemotherapeutic agents is described in the "Physicians' Desk Reference" (PDR), e.g., 1996 edition (Medical Economics Company, Montvale, NJ
30 07645-1742, USA) .

The amount and frequency of administration of the compounds of formula (I) or IA and the chemotherapeutic agents and/or radiation therapy will be regulated according to the judgment of the attending clinician (physician) considering such factors as age, condition and size of the patient as well as severity of the disease being treated. A dosage regimen of the compound of formula (I) or IA can be oral administration of from 10 mg to 2000 mg/day, preferably 10 to 1000 mg/day, more preferably 50 to 600 mg/day, in two to four (preferably two) divided doses, to block tumor growth. Intermittant therapy (e.g., one week out of three weeks or three out of four weeks) may also be used.
The chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation therapy can be administered according to therapeutic protocols well known in the art. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that the administration of the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation therapy can be varied depending on the disease being treated and the known effects of the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation therapy on that disease. Also, in accordance with the knowledge of the skilled clinician, the therapeutic protocols (e.g., dosage amounts and times of administration) can be varied in view of the observed is effects of the administered therapeutic agents (i.e., antineoplastic agent or radiation) on the patient, and in view of the observed responses of the disease to the administered therapeutic agents.
In the methods of this invention, a compound of formula (I) or IA is administered concurrently or sequentially with a chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation. Thus, it is not necessary that, for example, the chemotherapeutic agent and the compound of formula (I) or IA, or the radiation and the compound of formula (I) or IA, should be administered simultaneously or essentially simultaneously. The advantage of a simultaneous or essentially simultaneous administration is well within the determination of the skilled clinician.
Also, in general, the compound of formula (I) or IA and the chemotherapeutic agent do not have to be administered in the same pharmaceutical composition, and may, because of different physical and chemical characteristics, have to be administered by different routes. For example, the compound of formula (I) or IA may be administered orally to generate and maintain good blood levels thereof, while the chemotherapeutic agent may be administered intravenously. The determination of the mode of administration and the advisability of administration, where possible, in the same pharmaceutical composition, is well within the knowledge of the skilled clinician.
The initial administration can be made according to established protocols known in the art, and then, based upon the observed effects, the dosage, modes of administration and times of administration can be modified by the skilled clinician .
The particular choice of a compound of formula (I) or IA, and chemo-therapeutic agent and/or radiation will depend upon the diagnosis of the attending physicians and their judgement of the condition of the patient and the appropriate treatment protocol.
The compound of formula (I) or IA, and chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation may be administered concurrently (e.g., simultaneously, essentially simultaneously or within the same treatment protocol) or sequentially, depending upon the nature of the proliferative disease, the condition of the patient, and the actual choice of chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation to be administered in conjunction (i.e., within a single treatment protocol) with the compound of formula (I) or IA .
If the compound of formula (I) or IA, and the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation are not administered simultaneously or essentially simultaneously, then the initial order of administration of the compound of formula (1) and IA, and the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation, may not be important. Thus, the compound of formula (I) or IA may be administered first, followed by the administration of the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation; or the chemo-therapeutic agent and/or radiation may be administered first, followed by the administration of the compound of formula (I) or IA. This alternate administration may be repeated during a single treatment protocol. The determination of the order of administration, and the number of repetitions of administration of each therapeutic agent during a treatment protocol, is well within the knowledge of the skilled physician after evaluation of the disease being treated and the condition of the patient.
For example, the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation may be administered first, especially if it is a cytotoxic agent, and then the treatment continued with the administration of the compound of formula (I) or IA followed, where determined advantageous, by the administration of the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation, and so on until the treatment protocol is complete.
Thus, in accordance with experience and knowledge, the practicing physician can modify each protocol for the administration of a component (therapeutic agent--i.e., the compound of formula (I) or IA , chemotherapeutic agent or radiation) of the treatment according to the individual patient's needs, as the treatment proceeds.

The attending clinician, in judging whether treatment is effective at the dosage administered, will consider the general well-being of the patient as well as more definite signs such as relief of disease-related symptoms, inhibition of tumor growth, actual shrinkage of the tumor, or inhibition of metastasis. Size of the tumor can be measured by standard methods such as radio-logical studies, e.g., CAT or MRI
scan, and successive measurements can be used to judge whether or not growth of the tumor has been retarded or even reversed. Relief of disease-related symptoms such as pain, and improvement in overall condition can also be used to help judge effectiveness of treatment.
BIOLOGICAL EXAMPLES
The compounds of the present invention are useful in the treatment of CXC-chemokine mediated conditions and diseases. This utility is manifested in their ability to inhibit IL-8 and GRO-a chemokine as demonstrated by the following in vitro assays.
Receptor Binding Assays:
CXCR1 SPA Assay For each well of a 96 well plate, a reaction mixture of 10 g hCXCRI-CHO
overexpressing membranes (Biosignal) and 200 g/well WGA-SPA beads (Amersham) in 100 l was prepared in CXCR1 assay buffer (25 mM HEPES, pH 7.8, 2 mM CaC12, 1 mM MgCl2, 125 mM NaCl, 0.1 % BSA) (Sigma). A 0.4 nM stock of ligand, [1251]-IL-8 (NEN) was prepared in the CXCR1 assay buffer. 20X stock solutions of test compounds were prepared in DMSO (Sigma). A 6 X stock solution of IL-8 (R&D) was prepared in CXCR2 assay buffer. The above solutions were added to a 96-well assay plate (PerkinElmer) as follows: 10 l test compound or DMSO, 40 CXCRI assay buffer or IL-8 stock, 100 l of reaction mixture, 50 l of ligand stock (Final [Ligand] = 0.1 nM). The assay plates were shaken for 5 minutes on plate shaker, then incubated for 8 hours before cpm/well were determined in Microbeta Trilux counter (PerkinElmer). % Inhibition of Total binding-NSB (250 nM IL-8) was determined for IC50 values. Compounds of this invention had an IC50 of <20lLM.
The most preferred compounds had a K; within the range of 3nM to 1120nM.

CXCR2 SPA Assay For each well of a 96 well plate, a reaction mixture of 4 g hCXCR2-CHO
overexpressing membranes (Biosignal) and 200 g/well WGA-SPA beads (Amersham) in 100 l was prepared in CXCR2 assay buffer (25 mM HEPES, pH 7.4, 2 mM CaCl2, 1 mM MgC12). A 0.4 nM stock of ligand, [1251]-IL-8 (NEN), was prepared in the CXCR2 assay buffer. 20X stock solutions of test compounds were prepared in DMSO (Sigma). A 6 X stock solution of GRO-a (R&D) was prepared in CXCR2 assay buffer. The above solutions were added to a 96-well assay plate (PerkinElmer or Corning) as follows: 10 l test compound or DMSO, 40 ul CXCR2 assay buffer or GRO- a stock, 100 I of reaction mixture, 50 j l of ligand stock (Final [Ligand] _ 0.1 nM). When 40 X stock solutions of test compounds in DMSO were prepared, then the above protocol was used except instead 5 l test compound or DMSO and 45 p1 CXCR2 assay buffer were used. The assay plates were shaken for 5 minutes on a plate shaker, then incubated for 2-8 hours before cpm/well were determined in Microbeta Trilux counter (PerkinElmer). % Inhibition of total binding minus non-specific binding (250 nM Gro-a or 50 M antagonist) was determined and values calculated. Compounds of this invention had an IC50 of <5pM. The most preferred compounds had a K; within the range of 0.8nM to 40nM.

Calcium Fluorescence Assay (FLIPR) HEK 293 cells stably transfected with hCXCR2 and Gati/q were plated at 10,000 cells per well in a Poly-D-Lysine Black/Clear plate (Becton Dickinson) and incubated 48 hours at 5% C02, 37 C. The cultures were then incubated with 4 mM
fluo-4, AM (Molecular Probes) in Dye Loading Buffer (1 % FBS, HBSS w. Ca & Mg, 20 mM HEPES (Cellgro), 2.5 mM Probenicid (Sigma) for 1 hour. The cultures were washed with wash buffer (HBSS w Ca, & Mg, 20 mM HEPES, Probenicid (2.5 mM)) three times, then 100 l/well wash buffer was added.
During incubation, compounds were prepared as 4X stocks in 0.4% DMSO
(Sigma) and wash buffer and added to their respective wells in the first addition plate.
IL-8 or GRO-a (R&D Systems) concentrations were prepared 4X in wash buffer +
0.1 % BSA and added to their respective wells in second addition plate.
Culture plate and both addition plates were then placed in the FLIPR imaging system to determine change in calcium fluorescence upon addition of compound and then ligand. Briefly, 50 l of compound solutions or DMSO solution was added to respective wells and change in calcium fluorescence measured by the FLIPR for 1 minute. After a 3 minute incubation within the instrument, 50 l of ligand was then added and the change in calcium fluorescence measured by the FLIPR instrument for 5 I minute. The area under each stimulation curve was determined and values used to determine % Stimulation by compound (agonist) and % Inhibition of Total Calcium response to ligand (0.3 nM IL-8 or GRO-a) for IC50 values of the test compounds.
Chemotaxis assays for 293-CXCR2 A chemotaxis assay is setup using Fluorblok inserts (Falcon) for 293-CXCR2 cells 10 (HEK-293 cells overexpressing human CXCR2). The standard protocol used at present is as follows:
1. Inserts are coated with collagenIV (2ug/ml) for 2 hrs at 37 C.
2. The collagen is removed and inserts are allowed to air dry overnight.
3. Cells are labeled with 1 OuM calcein AM (Molecular Probes) for 2 hrs.
Labeling is 15 done in complete media with 2% FBS.
4. Dilutions of compound are made in minimal media (0.1% BSA) and placed inside the insert which is positioned inside the well of a 24 well plate. Within the well is IL-8 at a concentration of 0.25nM in minimal media. Cells are washed and resuspended in minimal media and placed inside the insert at a concentration of 20 50,000 cells per insert.
5. Plate is incubated for 2hrs and inserts are removed and placed in a new 24 well.
Fluorescence is detected at excitation=485 nM and emission=530 nM.

C otoxicity Assays A cytotoxicity assay for CXCR2 compounds is conducted on 293-CXCR2 cells.
25 Concentrations of compounds are tested for toxicity at high concentrations to determine if they may be used for further evaluation in binding and cell based assays.
The protocol is as follows:
1. 293-CXCR2 cells are plated overnight at a concentration of 5000 cells per well in complete media.
30 2. Dilutions of compound are made in minimal media w/0.1% BSA. Complete media is poured off and the dilutions of compound are added. Plates are incubated for 4, 24 and 48hrs. Cells are labeled with 10uM calcein AM for 15 minutes to determine cell viability. Detection method is the same as above.

Soft Agar Assay 10,000 SKMEL-5 cells/well are placed in a mixture of 1.2% agar and complete media with various dilutions of compound. Final concentration of agar is 0.6%.
After 21 days viable cell colonies are stained with a solution of MTT (1 mg/ml in PBS).
Plates are then scanned to determine colony number and size. IC50 is determined by comparing total area vs. compound concentration.

Compounds of formula (I) or IA may be produced by processes known to those skilled in the art in the following reaction schemes and in the preparations and examples below.
A general procedure for the preparation of compounds of formula I or IA is as follows:

Scheme 1 13 HO / I Step A R13 R N -H + \ NO2 Step B R14'N

OH
O O

H2N' A +
EtO OEt O O

Et0 N\ A + R14,N

OH

Y-- R14' I
N iA

Scheme 2 R14' k, :01 - \ + \ 11~/ t~
NH2 - R14-~~ -O OH Et0 OEt 11 OEt O OH

lip 14, R I I Q , X "A
N
OEt R II H
O OH O OH

Scheme 1 An amine is condensed (Step A) with a nitrosalicylic acid under standard coupling conditions and the resulting nitrobenzamide is reduced (Step B) under hydrogen atmosphere in the presence of a suitable catalyst. The remaining partner required for the synthesis of the final target is prepared by condensing an aryl amine with the commercially available diethyisquarate to give the aminoethoxysquarate product. Subsequent condensation of this intermediate with the aminobenzamide prepared earlier provides the desired chemokine antagonist (Scheme 1).
Scheme 2 Alternatively, the aminobenzamide of Scheme 1 is first condensed with commercially available diethylsquarate to give an alternate monoethoxy intermediate.
Condensation of this intermediate with an amine gives the desired chemokine antagonist.
Scheme 3 R6 R4 f \~ R4 NO2 N,. N\ N N ' N
H2N NH2 N' H -~H
O O

R5 X ,A i~ :(- Rfi Et0 N A

N
N\\-N H H
H

Scheme 4 H2N NO2 NYN`H Nr H

O O

R5 Rg O O Et0) N-A
R4 / ` - H
N-A

NYN'Fi H H

Scheme 3 Benztriazole compounds of Formula (I) or IA are prepared by stirring nitrophenylenediamines with sodium nitrite in acetic acid at 60 C to afford the nitrobenzotriazole intermediate (Scheme 3). Reduction of the nitro group in the presence of palladium catalyst and hydrogen atmosphere provides the amine compound. Subsequent condensation of this intermediate with the aminooethoxysquarate prepared earlier (Scheme 1) provides the desired chemokine antagonist.

Scheme 4 Condensation of nitrophenylenediamines with anhydrides or activated acids at reflux (Scheme 4) affords benzimidazole intermediates which after reduction with hydrogen gas and palladium catalyst and condensation with the aminoethoxysquarate previously prepared (Scheme 1) affords benzimidazole chemokine antagonists.

Scheme 5 Rio NO2 R1o NH2 A B 9,N-A
EtO R5 H

q Rio ~ H
N-NH
C
5 Scheme 6 R1o NH2 R10 Np2 NH

.A
Et0 N

R10 I N N'A
NH
R
Scheme 5 Indazole structures of Formula (I) or IA can be prepared according to Scheme 10 5 by reduction of nitroindazole A (J. Am. Chem Soc. 1943, 65, 1804-1805) to give aminoindazole B and subsequent condensation with the aminoethoxysquarate prepared earlier (Scheme 1).

Scheme 6 15 Indole structures of Formula (1) or IA can be prepared according to Scheme by reduction of nitroindole A (J. Med. Chem. 1995, 38, 1942-1954) to give aminoindole B and subsequent condensation with the aminoethoxysquarate prepared earlier (Scheme 1).

The invention disclosed herein is exemplified by the following preparations and examples which should not be construed to limit the scope of the disclosure.
Alternative mechanistic pathways and analogous structures may be apparent to those skilled in the art.

C N02 + -H O OH

OH OH
3-Nitrosalicylic acid (500 mg, 2.7 mmol), DCC (563 mg) and ethyl acetate (10 ml-) were combined and stirred for 10 min. (R) -(-)-2-pyrrolidinemethanol (0.27 ml-) was added and the resulting suspension was stirred at room temperature overnight.
The solid was filtered and the filtrate washed with I N NaOH. The aqueous phase was io acidified and extracted with EtOAc. The resulting organic phase was dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Purification of the residue by preparative plate chromatography (silica gel, 5% MeOH/CH2CI2 saturated with AcOH) gave the product (338 mg, 46%, MH+ = 267).

HO : + HO-Q Step A HO N I
NO 2 N.H NO2 Step B HON \ I

O OH

Step A
3-Nitrosalicylic acid (9.2 g), bromotripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate (PyBroP, 23 g) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (DIEA, 26 mL) in anhydrous CH2CI2 (125 ml-) were combined and stirred at 25 C for 30 min. (R) -(+)-3-pyrrolidinol (8.7 g) in CH2CI2 (25 ml-) was added over 25 min and the resulting suspension was stirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture was extracted with 1 M NaOH (aq) and the organic phase was discarded. The aqueous phase was acidified with 1 M HCI (aq), extracted with EtOAc, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford the crude product (7 g) which was used without further purification.

StepB
The crude product from Step A above was stirred with 10% Pd/C (0.7 g) in MeOH (100 ml-) undera hydrogen gas atmosphere overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite, the filtrate concentrated in vacuo, and the resulting residue purified by column chromatography (silica gel, 10% MeOH/CH2CI2 saturated with NH4OH) to give the product (2.5 g, 41 %, MH+=223).
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.1 O
NON NH
H2N NBoc H H

To N-BOC-3-(amino)piperidine (0.5 g) dissolved in CH2CI2 (10 mL) was added benzylisocyanate (3 mmol). After stirring for 2 hrs, amine scavenger resin (1.9 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred overnight, filtered, the resin back-washed with CH2CI2 and methanol, and the organics concentrated in vacuo. Stirring of the crude material in 4N HCI/dioxane (40 ml-) for 2.5 hrs before concentrating in vacuo gave the title compound (41 %, MH+=369).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.2 - 2.6 Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 2.1 but using the isocyanate (or chloroformate) indicated in the Table below, the amines were obtained and used without further purification.

Prep Amine Isocyanate Amine Ex.
2.2 aNCO H 'it, H
NH .NH

2.3 NH ONCO H2N QNANCNH

H H
2.4 0 NH
HaN NCO NH
~~N N
H
2.5 O O
H2N NH -~OACI /-OA H J:~'NH
2.6NH ~\NCO

H H
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.7 F 0 S o NH

To F~>r \H

To N-BOC-3-(amino)piperidine (5 mmol) dissolved in CH2CI2 (30 ml-) was added trifluoromethanesulfonic anhydride (5 mmol) and the mixture was stirred overnight. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo, diluted with CH2CI2 (10 ml-) and treated with trifluoroacetic acid (10 mL). After stirring for 2 hr, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo to give the title compound (43%, MH+=233.1).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.8 \ 1 Step A 0 p ~

H02C N02 IN, N, OH O O OH
Step B p- CNXCO2H N NO2 30 O HO2C O OH

Step C 0 / N NH2 HO2C p OH

StepA
3-Nitrosalicylic acid (5 mmol) and N-hydroxysuccinimide (5 mmol) were added to a solution of 2% DMF/CH2CI2, followed by DCC (5 mmol). After stirring for 2 hr, the mixture was filtered and concentrated in vacuo and the residue used directly in Step 10 B.

Step B
The product from Step A above was suspended in DMF and to this was added morpholino-2-carboxylic acid HCI (5 mmol) in CH2CI2 (10 mL)/DMF (5 ml-) and 15 diisopropylethylamine (10 mmol). The mixture was stirred overnight, filtered, basified with 1 N NaOH (50 mL), washed with CH2CI2, acidified with 5N HCI and extracted with EtOAc. The organic phase was dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the desired compound which was used directly in Step C (MH+=296).

Step C
Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2 Step B, but using the product from Step B above, the title compound was obtained (23%, MH+=267).
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.9 H
N CO2H Step A N N N_H Step B
CX
N C02H )MI
C H
i N CY, ~
NJ'NStep C N N~
N Step A

2-Piperazinecarboxylic acid and 2-chloro-1,3-pyrimidine were stirred with triethylamine and MeOH. After stirring overnight at reflux, the mixture was filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the desired compound which was used directly in Step B (MH+ = 209).

Step B
Following a similar procedure as Preparative Example 2.8, Step B except using the product from Preparative Example 2.9 Step A above, the desired compound was obtained (41 %, MH+ = 374).

Step C
Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2, Step B, but using the product from Step B above, the desired compound was obtained (99%, MH+=344).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.10 Step A 0 ,o N Step B
\N N-H N N N :aN N02 Y

O
Step C

H N N YCI

Step A
Following a similar procedure as Preparative Example 2.8, Step A except using 3-nitrobenzoic acid, the desired compound was obtained and used directly in Step B.
Step B
Following a similar procedure as Preparative Example 2.8, Step B except using the products from Preparative Example 2.9, Step A and Preparative Example 2.10, Step A, the desired compound was obtained (86%).

Step C
Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2, Step B, but using the product from Step B above, the desired compound was obtained (67%, MH+=331).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.11 Step A
HO ON
Step B
HO N.H
Step A
N-Benzylpiperidone (2 g, HCI salt, hydrate) was stirred with THE (20 mL), concentrated to dryness, and placed under high vac. The residue was diluted in THE
(20 mL), and methyllithium was added (2.5 eq of 1.6N in Et2O) via syringe.
After stirring for 3 hr, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo, diluted with water, extracted io with CH2CI2, and dried over Na2SO4. Filtration and concentrating in vacuo gave the desired product (50%, MH+ = 205).

Step B
Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2, Step B, but using the product from Step A above, the title compound was obtained (95%, MH+=116).
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.12 I Step B
Step A N
HN O
wN \ Step C TN'H
OH
OH

Step A
To N-benzyl-N-methylamine (20 mmol) dissolved in acetone (50 mL) was added concentrated HCI (20 mmol), paraformaldehyde (30 mmol) and 2-propanol (2 mL). After stirring at reflux overnight, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo, diluted with water, basified to pH 14 and extracted with ether. The organic phase was dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the desired product (98%) which was used directly in Step B.
Step B
The product from Step A above (500 mg) was dissolved in MeOH (20 mL) and to this was added NaBH4 (50 mg). After stirring for 10 min, the solution was concentrated in vacuo to give the desired compound which was used directly in Step C without purification.

Step C
The product from Step B above was diluted with MeOH (20 ml-) and to this was added AcOH (0.1 mL), a catalytic amount of Pd/C (10%) and the mixture stirred under H2 atmosphere (balloon) overnight. The mixture was filtered, 4N HCI in dioxane (1 ml-) was added, and the mixture was concentrated in vacuo to give the desired compound that was used directly without purification.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.13 HCI
Step A H
Me02C,,,NH2 N02 Step B H

Step A
Following a similar procedure as Preparative Example 2, Step A except using methyl glycinate, the desired ester was obtained. The mixture was poured into mL of 1 N NaOH, then extracted with dichloromethane. The pH was adjusted to I
and NaCl was added until saturation. After several hours, the resulting precipitate was filtered and washed with cold water to give the desired product (42%).

Step B
5 Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2 Step B, but using the product from Step A above, the title compound was obtained (95%).
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.14 HCI
H Step A N
Me02C,N, r NO2 Step B Y-,:?-- NI-12 StepA
Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2.13, Step A except using methyl N-methylglycinate, the desired product was obtained (18%).

Step B
Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2, Step B, but using the product from Step A above, the title compound was obtained (95%, MH+ =
225).
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.15 HO + HO
NHZ H H
0 OH Et0 H O OH

The cyclobutenedione intermediate from Preparative Example 87 (200mg), DI EA (100ul), 3-aminosalicylic acid (1 20mg) and EtOH (4m1) were combined and heated to reflux overnight to give the title compound (90%, MH+=367).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.16 N CI H
~ N\ \

The above n-oxide (2g) was combined with H2NMe/H20 (15cm3) and heated to 140 C overnight. Potassium carbonate (1.3g) added and the mixture concentrated in vacuo. Extraction with EtOH and concentration of the filtrate in vacuo gave 1.56g of crude amine (MH+=125).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 3-10.50 Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Examples 1-2 but using the carboxylic acid, amine, and coupling agent [DCC (Prep. Ex. 1) or PyBrop (Prep.
Ex.
2)] listed in the Table below, the indicated amide products were obtained and used without further purification.

Prep Carboxylic Amine Product 1. Coupling Ex. acid Agent 2. % Yield 3. MH+
3 \ 1. PyBrop N02 N-H \ \ 2.87%,86%
HO2C OH / \ NH2 3.181 O OH

4 1. PyBroP
N02 yNH .H02C h(PNH2 3.209 O OH
5 0 , NH3 / 1. PyBroP
N02 2.95%
HO2C OH H2N NH2 3.153 6 -NH2 / 1. PyBroP
NO2 I 2.83%
HO2C OH H. N NH2 3. 167 O OH
7 1. PyBroP
NO2 ~2.76%

OH CH 3.223 O OH
8 ~ ~\ HO HO i 1. PyBroP
N02 ~N 2.65, 53 HO2C OH N%H O OH NH2 3.209 9 1. PyBroP
NO2 ON, N /( 2. 59, 69 Ho2C OH H NH2 3. 207 O OH
HO_, H0 1. PyBroP
N02 2.49, 86 Ho2C OH ON K1l,Ic1NH2 3.2 "'H O OH
10.1 -7 1 1. PyBroP
2. 30,88 HO2C OH NO2 H/N NH 3. 193 z 10.2 y 1. PyBroP
e N02 N 2. 26,87 HO2C OH Y H~ NH 3. 195 z 10.3 H I 1. PyBroP
N02 -, ~iNH2 N NH2 38 HO2C"2 3. 209 Hoe H O OH
10.4 1. PyBroP
e N 2. 29 HO2C NO2 NH2 Y-( NH2 3. 209 OH O OH
10.5 H 1. PyBroP
NH2 JNy1ILNH 2.38 No 2 3. 223 H02C Off 2 OH

10.6 2.7 02 1. PyBroP
1 NO O F3C'S~N N \ NH2 2. 32,99 H Ho2C
11 ~ OH 2 ~S~ NH 0 OH 3. 367.9 10.7 / 1. PyBroP
H 2. 35,99 HO2C OH NO2 N O \ NH2 3. 237 N OH
OH

OH
10.8 cs~ 1. DCC
2. 30,99 cNf)~lNH 2 3. 269 HOBO
10.9 2.11 1. PyBroP
N 2. 58,95 HO2C OH NO2 NH HO 0 OH NH2 3. 233.1 HO
10.10 2.12 1,1,[:: 1. PyBroP
NO2 OH YEN \ I NH2 2. 42,95 H02C OH .-~NH HO 0 OH 3. 238.9 10.13 2.4 0 1. PyBroP
n k O ----Nlk N N \ NH2 2. 51,95 HO2C `oH N02 /--NkN oNH H H 0 OH 3. 307 H H

10.14 2.2 ,N 1. PyBroP
H H NHZ 2. 55 H02C OH NOz ~N/II\N NH o OH
3. 347 H H
10.15 2.1N 1. PyBroP
0 l i H H NHZ 2. 41 Ho2c OH / H H 3. 369.1 10.16 2.3 , \ ~N 1. PyB ro P
1, H Hs NHZ 2. 56 3. 354.9 Ho2c' off N02 0 \ NAN NH 0 OH
H H
10.17 2.5 1. PyBroP
e-I IOI f^l O N N alNH2 2. 56 OH N02 /\0 u N fNH H O OH 3. 308 H02C /\
H
10.18 12.4 OH 1. PyBroP
OH 2. 10,95 H02C off NO2 0 3. 252.9 ~N \

O OH

10.19 1. PyBroP
No2 H o 2. 42,95 HO2C OH p- Y
[a [a NH2 3. 249 N OH

10.20 1. PyBroP
~~ HO H 2. 15,95 HO2CI off NO2 NH2 3. 264.9 N OH
OH
10.21 NH2 1. PyBroP
HO o ,? 2. 64,95 Ho2c OH NO2 N H
3. 273 NH OH

HO

yBroP
10.22 yl:;-. 1. P
QNO2 HO N~ o 2. 45,95 NH2 3. 273 H02C off HO
10.23 i 1. PyBroP
QNO2 o4 NH2 0 ~ ~ 2. 44,95 H02CNH2 3. 281 OH NH OH
O~
-~O
10.24 / 1. PyBroP
QNO2 2. 41,95 H02C offI H O
y-1: \ NH2 3. 281.1 N OH
N
10.25 / I 1. PyBroP
KI-I No2 I H o \ 2. 48,95 HO2C ll~ OH , NH2 3. 257 N OH

10.26 1. DCC
2. 15,99 / 1 N02 NH N'12 3. 235 HOZC OH
O OH
10.28 H i 1. PyBroP
o 2. 52,95 NO2 Ho/~~ > NH2 3. 237.1 HOZC OH ~--/
N OH
HO/'~*-o 10.29 OH 1. PyBroP
H O 2. 31,95 H02COOHN02 N NH2 3. 259.1 HO N OH
0~
10.30 H 1. PyBroP
QNO2 Ho 2. 54,95 Ho2c ff NH2 3. 250.9 HO OH

10.31 H 1. PyBroP
e-l HO~~ O 2. 64,95 N -I:?-- H02C OH NO2 NH2 3. 210.9 Ho- i\ OH

10.32 HOB/NH2 1. PyBroP
` NO O I 2. 47,95 H02c OH 2 NH2 3. 197 HO,,,,iNH OH
10.33 H 1. PyBroP
HO^~ N I ~~ O 2. 47,95 Ho2c N02 NH2 3. 273 OH
HO,-,,N OH

10.34 1. PyBroP
1 NH O p 2. 51,95 HO2C OH NO2 NH2 3. 237.1 N
HO OH
HO
10.35 NH2 1. PyBroP
O OH 0 2. 60,90 ~ \/ NH2 N NH2 3. 224 10.36 0 NH2 1. PyBroP
P\- N~ Off 2. 65,99 OH Noy / NMe2 0 3. 252 HoZc N - NMe2 10.37 0 NH2 1. PyBroP
~ OH 2. 58,99 HOZC OMe 3. 239 OH
N
OMe O
10.38 NH2 1. PyBroP
OH 2. 35,99 Ho2c OH NO2 3. 221.1 ON N
H

10.39 NH2 1. PyBroP
QNO2 2. 42,99 Ho2c off N 3. 235.2 H N

10.40 O NH2 1. DCC
NO2 HN OEt OH 2. 32,99 H02c OH , N 3. 293.1 OEt 10.41 HO NH2 1. PyBroP
No2 NH OH 2. 45,99 H02c OH 3. 223.1 N ,,~OH

10.42 HO HO 1. PyBroP
NO, 2, 55,81 HO2C OH 2 3. 251.1 NH
O OH
10.43 q 1. PyBroP
Ho2c OH No2 ^/N 2. 68,66 HO"~ NH HO O OH NH2 3. 224.9 10.44 OH OH 1. PyBroP
H02c OH No2 i I 2. 68,66 HO~~NH HO\ NH2 3. 241.1 O OH

10.45 12.3 / 1. PyBroP
Ho2c 11-C -OH NOZ 01 O1 NH2 2. 44,40 NH N 3. 295 O OH
O O

10.46 1. DCC
OH NOZ NH 2. 37,81 HOZC
NH2 3. 265 HO O HO NO O OH

10.47 2.6 O 1. PyBroP
NH A NH2 2. 71,95 HOZC OH NO2 H H O OH 3. 293.1 N N
H H
10.48 i 1. PyBroP
,N NH2 ,N H 2. 35,99 Ho2c OHNOZ N Y N
Y OH NH2 3. 220.9 N-N N-N O
10.49 i 1. DCC
NH2 N 2. 16,99 -,:;
Ho2c OH Noe OH NH2 3. 209.0 10.50 n POH 1. DCC
H2N N NH2 2. 18,99 Ho2c OHNO2 H2N NH o O 3. 264.0 PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 10.55 Alternative Procedure for Preparative Example 3 Step A

HO
I NO 2 -~ CI I / NO2 Y --r O OH O OH

To the nitrosalicylic acid (3 g) dissolved dichloromethane (150 mL) at room temperature was added oxalyl chloride (4.3 mL) and DMF (0.01 eq.). After stirring for one day the mixture was concentrated in a vacuum to give a semi solid which was used directly in step B.

Step B

CI NO

To the material from step A diluted in dichloromethane (50 mL) and cooled to 0 C was added dimethyl amine in THE (2N solution, 24.6 mL) and triethylamine (4 eq.). After stirring for 24 hours at room temperature the mixture was concentrated in vacuo, diluted with I M sodium hydroxide (30 mL) and after a half hour was washed with dichloromethane. The aqueous phase was acidified with 6M HCI (aq), extracted with dichloromethane and the organic phase was washed with water, dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the title compound (3.2 g, 93%).

Step C

N NO2 i N NH2 A mixture of the product from step B above (6 g), 10% Pd/C (0.6 g), and EtOH
(80 mL) was stirred in a parr shaker under hydrogen (40 psi) at room temperature for 2 days. Filtration through celite and concentration in vacuo afforded the title product (5.1 g, 99%, MH+ = 181).

1 Step A ' Step B I Step C 02 H2 Step A
Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 1 except using dimethylamine (2M in THF, 33 mL) and 5-methylsalicylic acid (5 g), the desired product was prepared (6.5 g).

Step B
Nitric acid (0.8 ml-) in H2SO4 was added to a cooled (-20 C) suspension of the product from Step A above (3 g) in H2SO4 (25 mL). The mixture was treated with 50%
NaOH (aq) dropwise, extracted with CH2CI2, dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the product as a crude solid (2.1 g, 44%, MH+ =
225).
Step C
The product was prepared in the same manner as described in Step B of Preparative Example 2 (0.7 g, 99%, MH+ = 195).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 11.1 OH / OH

O OH

OH
N \ NHZ

Step A
The above amine was reacted with the acid using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 2, Step A to yield the desired amide (54%).

Step B
Na2S2O4 (1.22g) was dissolved in water (4m1) followed by the addition of NH3/H20 (300ul). The solution ws then added to the product from Step A (200 mg) in a:

dioxane (4m1) and stirred for 30min. The crude material was purified via flash column chromatography (CH2CI2/MeOH, 20:1) to give 100mg of product (56%, MH+=251).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 11.2 OiN NHz Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 11.1, Steps A and B, but using N-methylmethoxylamine, the title compound was obtained (86%, MH+=181).
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 11.10 OH
HO

ONH + HO I

yl:;~
HOBO 0 OH HO-k\0 0 OH
OH
(DtN

Step A
Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 1, but using N-hydroxysuccinimide and 2% DMF in CH2CI2, the desired amide was obtained (33%, MH+=297).

Step B
Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 2, Step B, the amine was prepared (99%, MH+=267).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 11.11 - 11.18 Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Examples 11.11 but using the carboxylic acid, amine, and coupling agent DCC indicated, the indicated amide products were obtained and used without further purification.
Prep Carboxylic Amine Product 1. % Yield Ex. acid 2. MH+
11.11 1. 45,92 OH
2. 310.0 OH H

11.12 N H H 1. 45,95 QNO2 \N NHZ 2. 247.2 CIH.HZN
11.13 1. 85,85 H N 2. 251.1 HOZC OH
yN O OH
O OH
OH
11.14 OH OH 1. 99,92 NH N 2. 211.1 O OH
11.15 0 0 1. 48,84 NO2 HO 2. 265 NH o OH
11.16 1. 78,91 \ NO2 N~/NH N/~/N NH2 2. 238.1 HOZC OH / / O OH

11.17 (IIA N02 1. 67,90 HOZC OH HO N \ I NH2 2. 265.1 HO NH

11.18 O o" 1. 28,99 HOZC NOZ HO N NH2 2. 267 OH

0 off HO )r"--r-N02 Step A O

O OH O OH

Step B Step C I
O OH O OMe N N
Step D I r~' I Step E I zr~ I
~N 'N

O OMe 0 OH

Step F

O OH

Step A
Following a similar procedure as described in Preparative Example 2 Step A
except using dimethylamine in place of R-(+)-3-pyrrolidinol, the desired product was prepared.
Step B
The product from step A above (8 g) was combined with iodine (9.7 g), silver sulfate (11.9 g), EtOH (200 mL) and water (20 ml-) and stirred overnight.
Filtration, concentration of the filtrate, re-dissolution in CH2CI2 and washing with 1 M
HCI (aq) gave an organic solution which was dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford the product (7.3 g, 57%, MH+ = 337).
Step C
The product from Step B above (3.1 g) was combined with DMF(50 mL) and Mel (0.6 mL). NaH (60% in mineral oil, 0.4 g) was added portionwise and the mixture was stirred overnight. Concentration in vacuo afforded a residue which was diluted with CH2CI2, washed with IM NaOH (aq), dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Purification through a silica gel column (EtOAc/Hex, 1:1) gave the desired compound (1.3 g, 41 %, MH+ = 351).
Step D
The product from Step D above (200 mg), Zn(CN)2 (132 mg), Pd(PPh3)4 (130 mg) and DMF (5 ml-) were heated at 80 C for 48 hrs, then cooled to room temperature and diluted with EtOAc and 2M NH4OH. After shaking well, the organic extract was dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered, concentrated in vacuo and purified by preparative plate chromatography (Silica, EtOAc/Hex, 1:1) to give the desired compound (62 mg, 44%, MH+ = 250).

Step E
BBr3 (1.3 mL, 1 M in CH2CI2) was added to a CH2CI2 solution (5 mL) of the product from step D above (160 mg) and stirred for 30 min. The mixture was diluted with water, extracted with CH2CI2, dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give the desired compound (158 mg, MH+ = 236).

Step F
A mixture of the product from step E above (160 mg), platinum oxide (83%, 19 mg), and EtOH (20 mL) was stirred under hydrogen (25-40 psi) for 1.5 hr.
Filtration through celite and concentration in vacuo afforded the product (165 mg, MH+ =
206).
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 12.1 N Step A N Step B
NH N qN 02 N O
Step C

StepA
Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2, Step A except using 3-(methylaminomethyl)pyridine and 3-nitrosalicylic acid, the desired compound was prepared (41 %).

Step B
The compound from Step A above (0.3 g) was diluted with chloroform (15 ml-) and stirred with mCPBA (0.4 g) for 2 hr. Purification by column chromatography (silica, 10% MeOH/CH2CI2) gave the pyridyl N-oxide (0.32 g, 100%, MH+ =
303.9).
StepC
Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 11.1, Step B, but using the product from Step B above, the desired compound was obtained (15%, MH+=274).
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 12.2 Step A i HO -rr I NO2 ~O I NO2 O OH O OH

i Step B ~o Step A
3-Nitrosalicylic acid (4 g) in MeOH (100 ml-) and concentrated H2SO4 (1 ml-) were stirred at reflux overnight, concentrated in vacuo, diluted with CH2CI2, and dried over Na2SO4. Purification by column chromatography (silica, 5% MeOH/CH2CI2) gave the methyl ester (2.8 g, 65%).

Step B
Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2, Step B, but using the product from Step A above, the desired compound was obtained (95%, MH+=1 67.9).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 12.3 p NH 0 NH
O
\-~O O
HO

To morpholine-2-carboxilic acid (200mg) in EtOH (40mL) at 0 C was added acetyl chloride (3mL) and the mixture was stirred at reflux overnight.
Concentration in vacuo, dilution with CH2CI2 and washing with NaHCO3 (aq) gave the title compound (99%, MH+ = 160.1).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 12.4 O OH OH
O O
~.NBoc LNH2HCI

To N-Boc morpholine-2-carboxylic acid (2g) in THE (5m1) at 0 C was added a solution of borane.THF complex (1 N, 10.38m1) and the mixture was stirred for 30min at 0 C, and for 2hr at room temperature. Water (200ml) was added to the reaction and the mixture extracted with CH2CI2, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to give 490mg of product (26%). The product was then stirred in 4N HCI/dioxane to give the amine salt.

I Step A
HO
O OH O OH

Step B Step C
yj~ I;k O OH
Step D I

O OH

Step A
Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 1 except using dimethylamine (2M in THF, 50 mL) and 4-methylsalicylic acid (15 g), the desired compound was prepared (6.3 g, 35%).

StepB
The product from step A above (1.5 g) was combined with iodine (2.1 g), NaHCO3 (1.1 g), EtOH (40 ml-) and water (10 ml-) and stirred overnight.
Filtration, concentration of the filtrate, re-dissolution in CH2CI2 and washing with 1 M
HCI (aq) gave an organic solution which was dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by flash column chromatography (silica gel, 0.5-0.7% MeOH/CH2CI2) gave the product (0.5 g, 20%, MH+ = 306).
Step C
Nitric acid (3.8 ml-) in AcOH (10 ml-) was added to the product from Step B
above (0.8 g) and the mixture was stirred for 40 min. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with CH2CI2, dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the product as an orange solid (0.8 g, 92%, MH+
= 351).

Step D
A mixture of the product from step C above (800 mg), 10% Pd/C (100 mg), and EtOH/MeOH (40 mL) was stirred in a parr shaker under hydrogen (45 psi) for 1.5 hr.
Filtration through celite and concentration in vacuo afforded the title product after purification by preparative plate chromatography (Silica, 10% MeOH/CH2CI2, saturated with NH4OH) to give the product (92 mg, 22%, MH+ = 195).
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.1 Br Br Step A Step B

O ~
O O
OH OH
Br Step C Br ' I\
N N /
O N02 ~ O NH2 OH OH
Step A
Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2, Step A except using dimethylamine (2M in THF, 23 ml) and 5-bromosalicylic acid (5g), the desired compound was prepared (4.2g, 75%, MH+=244).

Step B
Nitric acid (10ml) in AcOH (100ml) was added to the product from Step A
above (2g) and the mixture was stirred for 20 min. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with CH2CI2, dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the product as a yellow solid (1.9g, 80%, MH+=289).

StepC
The product from Step B above (1.9g) was partially dissolved in EtOH(50ml).
Conc HCI in EtOH (5ml in 40ml), followed by SnCI2.2H20 (5.74g) was added and stirred at room temperature overnight. The crude reaction was concentrated in vacuo, diluted with CH2CI2 and washed with NaHCO3, dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the product as a solid (185mg, 9%, MH+=259).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.2 Cl CI
Step A \ Step B
HO + / N I .
O O
OH OH

Cl Cl Step C

N I N /

O OH OH
Step A
Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2, Step A, except using dimethylamine (2M in THF, 29 ml) and 5-chlorosalicylic acid (5g), the desired compound was prepared (4.5g, 78%, MH+=200).

Step B
Nitric acid (10ml) in AcOH (100ml) was added to the product from Step A
above (2g) and the mixture was stirred for 20 min. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with CH2CI2, dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the product as a solid (2.2g, 88%, MH+=245).

Step C
The product from Step B above (2.2g) was partially dissolved in EtOH(50m1).
Conc HCI in EtOH (5ml in 40ml), followed by SnCI2.2H20 (7.01 g) was added and stirred at room temperature overnight. The crude reaction was concentrated in vacuo, diluted with CH2CI2 and neutralized with NaOH. The entire emulsion was filtered though celite, the layers were separated and the organic layer was dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give a solid (540mg, 22%, MH+=215).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.3 Step A Step B
HO / NO No, I ]No N
2 --(: N02 OH O OH

Step C Step D
1W. \ N 10 OMe OMe Br Step E Br I \
N

OMe Step A
3-Nitrosalicylic acid (10g), PyBroP (20.52g), and DIEA (28m1) in anhydrous CH2CI2 (200m1) were combined and stirred at room temperature for 10 min.
Dimethylamine (2M in THE, 55m1) was added and let the reaction stir over the weekend. The mixture was extracted with 1 N NaOH (aq) and the organic phase was discarded. The aqueous phase was acidified with 1 N HCI (aq), extracted with CH2CI2, dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The oil was taken up in ether and a solid crashed out, triterated in ether to give 4.45g of a solid (39%, MH+=21 1).

Step B
The product from Step A (2.99g), K2CO3 (9.82g), and iodomethane (8.84m1) were combined in acetone and heated to reflux overnight. The reaction was filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The oil was taken up in CH2CI2 and washed with I N

NaOH, dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 3.3g of an oil (99%, MH+=225).

Step C
The crude product from Step B (3.3g) was stirred with 10% Pd/C (350mg) in EtOH (50m1) under a hydrogen gas atmosphere at 20psi overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give 2.34 g of a solid (85%, MH+=195).

StepD
The product from Step C (469mg) was dissolved in AcOH (6ml). 1.95M Br2 in AcOH (1.23m1) was added dropwise to the reaction and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. 50% NaOH was added to the reaction at 0 C and the mixture was extracted with CH2CI2, dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by preparative plate chromatography (Silica, 5% MeOH/ CH2CI2) to give the desired product (298mg, 23%, MH+=273).

Step E
BBr3 (2.14ml, 1 M in CH2CI2) was added to a CH2CI2 solution (8m1) of the product from Step D above (290mg) and stirred overnight. A solid formed and was filtered, taken up in MeOH/ CH2CI2 and purified by preparative plate chromatography (Silica, 5% MeOH/ CH2CI2) to give the desired product (1 37mg, 49%, MH+=259).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.4 Step A
Br O 2 OMe OMe Step B

N
/ 0 ~ NH2 OH
Step A
To the product from Preparative Example 13.3 Step D (200mg) was added phenylboronic acid (98mg), PdC12(PPh3)2 (51 mg), and Na2CO3 (155mg) in THF/H20 (4ml/1 ml). The solution was heated at 80 C overnight. EtOAc was added to reaction and washed with 1 N NaOH. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by preparative plate chromatography (5% McOH/ CH2CI2) to give 128mg of an oil (65%, MH+=271).
Step B
Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 13.3 Step E and using the product from Step A above, the desired compound was prepared (0.1 g, 69%, MH+=257.1).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.5-13.7 Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Examplel 3.4 but using the boronic acid from the Preparative Example indicated in the Table below, the amine products were obtained.

Prep Ex. Boronic Acid Product 1. Yield (%) 2. MH+
13.5 ~N 1. 15%
Q_N/ 2. 258 B(OH)2 N NH2 13.6 CF3 1. 32%
CF3 2. 325 B(OH)2 I

O OH
13.7 F3C 1. 18%
F3C 2. 325 a B(OH)2 iN \ I

Preparative Example 13.8 Step A H Step B
NC 'Q 10- N OH N NX OH

Step C

N I / NOS N NHS
N N,~1 OH N N-N OH

Step A
2-Cyanophenol (500mg), sodium azide (819mg), and triethylamine hydrochloride (1.73g) were combined in anhydrous toluene and heated to 99 C
overnight. After the reaction cooled down, product was extracted with H2O.
Aqueous layer was acidified with conc. HCI dropwise giving a precipitate, which was filtered to give the product (597mg, 87%, MH+=163).

Step B
Nitric acid (0.034m1) in AcOH (5m1) was added to the product from Step A
io above (100mg) in AcOH and the mixture was allowed to stir for 1 hr. CH2CI2 and H2O
were added to reaction. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give an oil. Trituration in ether gave the product as a solid (12mg, 9%, MH+=208).

Step C
The product from step C (56mg) was stirred with 10% Pd/C (20mg) in EtOH/MeOH (15m1) under a hydrogen gas atmosphere overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite, the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give 29mg of a solid (62%, MH+=178).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.9 Cl HA

The amine was prepared following the procedure disclosed in WO Patent Application 01/68570.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.10 H2N\
O,S Q NH2 The amine was prepared following the procedure disclosed in WO Patent Application 01/68570.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.11 Q Step Q Q Step = F3C O \
lop \ / F3C ( /

Ph Step C F3C/H O Step DCF30 'CIH.H2N \ /
N
Ph Step A
Following the procedure described in Preparative Example 88.2, Step A, the ketone was prepared (6.4g, 36%).

Step B
To a solution of ketone (1g) and 2-R-methylbenzylamine (0.73m1) in anhydrous toluene (20m1) was added 1 N TiCl4 in toluene (3ml) at room temperature for 1.5hrs.
The precipitate was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and purified via flash column chromatography (Hex/EtOAc, 18/1) to give 800mg of product (71 %).

StepC
The imine from above (760mg) and DBU (800u1) were stirred without solvent for 4hr. The crude reaction was concentrated in vacuo and purified via flash column chromatography (Hex/EtOAc, 8/1) to give 600mg of product (79%).

Step D
The imine from Step C (560mg) was dissolved in ether (8m1). 3N HCI (5m1) added and let stir at room temperature overnight. The ether layer was separated and concentrated in vacuo to give 400mg of the amine hydrochloride product (93%).
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.12 O
CIH.H2N

The title compound was prepared similarly as in Preparative Example 13.11, but using the 2-S-methylbenzylamine instead of 2-R-methylbenzylamine (69%).
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.13 Step A~ Step B

O \ H O \

F3C \ Step F3 C Step E CF3 Step C I p O
N CIH.H2N \ /
-~ N
a~~1 I
Ph Ph Step A
At room temperature, CsF (60mg) was added to a mixture of furfuraldehyde (1.3m1) and TMS-CF3 (2.5g) and stirred at room temperature (24 h) and refluxed for another 12h. 3N HCI (40m1) was added and after 4hr, the mixture was extracted with ether, washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, and concentrated in vacuo to give the product (2.6g, 100%).

SteDB

To a solution of alcohol from above (2.6g) in CH2CI2 at room temperature was added Dess-Martin reagent (10g) portionwise and I drop of water.
After stirring for 3hr at room temperature, 10% Na2S2O3 (60m1) was added and after stirring overnight, the solid was filtered off and the filtrate was extracted with CH2CI2.
The organic layer was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, dried with MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Ether/hexane (1:2; 30m1) was added to the residue, filtered, and filtrate concentrated in vacuo to give the product (2g, 78%).
Step C
Following the procedures described in Preparative Example 13.11, Steps B, C
and D, the amine salt was prepared.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 13.15-13.17 Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.13, but using the prepared or commercially available aldehydes, the optically pure amine products in the Table below were obtained.

Prep Aldehyde Amine Product Yield (%) Ex.

13.15 34.12 20%

H I O H2N CIH.H2N

cl CI
13.16 31%
O = CF3 O
H I O H2N CIH.H2N

Br Br 13.17 O = CF3 66%

H O H2N I \ CIH.HZN

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.18 F3C CIH.H2N 1 100 s The title compound was prepared from trifluorophenylketone according to the procedures described in Preparative Example 13.11, Steps B, C, and D (68%).
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.19 MeO S Step A MeO S Step B HO S
\/ \/
HO Br Me0 Br MeO Br Step C
O O O
N $ Step E ''N S Step D ,N S
`
HO NI-12 Me0 N=<Ph Me0 Br Step A
Methyl-3-hydroxy-4-bromo-2-thiophenecarboxylate (10.0 g, 42.2 mmol) was dissolved in 250 mL of acetone. Potassium carbonate (30.0 g, 217.4 mmol) was added followed by a solution of iodomethane (14.5 mL, 233.0 mmol). The mixture was heated to reflux and continued for 6 h. After cooled to room temperature, the mixture was filtered, the solid material was rinsed with acetone (-200 mL).
The filtrate and rinsing were concentrated under reduced pressure to a solid, further dried on high vacuum, yielding 13.7 g (100%) of methyl-3-methoxy-4-bromo-2-thiophenecarboxylate (MH+ = 251.0).

Step B
Methyl-3-methoxy-4-bromo-2-thiophenecarboxylate (13.7 g), available from step A, was dissolved in 75 mL of THE, and added with a 1.0 M sodium hydroxide aqueous solution (65 mL, 65.0 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 h. A 1.0 M hydrogen chloride aqueous solution was added dropwise to the mixture until pH was approximately 2. The acidic mixture was extracted with (100 mL x 2, 50 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine (40 mL), dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated under reduced pressure to a solid, 10.0 g (100%, over two steps) of 3-methoxy-4-bromo-2-thiophenecarboxylic acid (MH+
237.0).

Step C
To a stirred solution of 3-methoxy-4-bromo-2-thiophenecarboxylic acid (6.5 g, 27.4 mmol) in 140 mL of CH2CI2, obtained from step B, was added bromo-tripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate (PyBrop, 12.8 g, 27.5 mmol), a 2.0 M
solution of dimethyl amine in THE (34.5mL, 69.0 mmol), and diisopropylethyl amine (12.0 mL, 68.7 mmol). After 3 d, the mixture was diluted with 100 mL of CH2CI2, and washed with a 1.0 M sodium hydroxide aqueous solution (30 mL x 3) and brine (30 mL). The organic solution was dried with Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated to an oil.
This crude oil product was purified by flash column chromatography, eluting with CH2CI2-hexanes (1:1, v/v). Removal of solvents afforded a solid, further dried on high vacuum, yielding 6.76 g (93 %) of N, N'dimethyl-3-methoxy-4-bromo-2-thiophenecarboxamide (MH+ = 265.0, M+2 = 266.1).

Step D
An oven dried three-neck round bottom flask was equipped with a refluxing condenser, charged sequentially with palladium acetate (95 mg, 0.42 mmol), (R)-BINAP (353 mg, 0.57 mmol), cesium carbonate (9.2 g, 28.33 mmol), and N, N' dimethyl-3-methoxy-4-bromo-2-thiophenecarboxamide (3.74 g, 14.2 mmol, from step C). The solid mixture was flushed with nitrogen. Toluene (95 mL) was added to the solid mixture followed by benzophenone imine (3.6 mL, 21.5 mmol). The mixture was heated to reflux and continued for 10 h. A second batch of palladium acetate (95 mg, 0.42 mmol) and (R)-BINAP (353 mg, 0.57 mmol) in 5 mL of toluene was added.
Refluxing was continued for 14 h. The third batch of palladium acetate (30 mg, 0.13 mmol) and (R)-BINAP (88 mg, 0.14 mmol) was added, and reaction continued at 110 C for 24 h. The mixture was cooled to room temperature, diluted with ether (50 mL), filtered through a layer of Celite, rinsing with ether. The filtrate and rinsing were concentrated under reduced pressure to an oil, which was purified twice by flash column chromatography using CH2CI2 and CH2CI2-MeOH (200:1) as eluents.
Removal of solvents afforded 4.1 g (79 %) of the amido-thiophene diphenylimine product as a solid (MH+ = 365.1).

Step E
To a stirred solution of thiophene imine (5.09 g, 13.97 mmol), obtained from step D, in 140 mL of CH2CI2 at -78 C was added dropwise a 1.0 M solution of boron tribromide in CH2CI2. The mixture was stirred for 3 h while the temperature of the cooling bath was increased slowly from -78 C to -15 C. 100 mL of H2O was added, the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min, then the two layers were separated. The organic layer (as A) was extracted with H2O (30 mL x 2). The aqueous layer and aqueous extracts were combined, washed with CH2CI2 (30 mL), and adjusted to pH - 8 using a saturated NaHCO3 aqueous solution. The neutralized aqueous solution was extracted with CH2CI2 (100 mL x 3), the extracts were washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated under reduced pressure to a light yellow solid, 1.49 g of N, N' dimethyl-3-hydroxy-4-amino-2-thiophenecarboxamide (first crop). The previous separated organic layer A and organic washing were combined, stirred with 30 mL of a 1.0 M HCI aqueous solution for I h. The two layers were separated, the aqueous layer was washed with CH2CI2 (30 mL) and adjusted to pH -8 using a saturated NaHCO3 aqueous solution, and the separated organic layer and organic washing were combined as organic layer B. The neutralized aqueous solution was extracted with CH2CI2 (30 mL x 4), the extracts were washed with brine, dried by Na2SO4, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give 0.48g of a solid as the second crop of the titled product. Organic layer B from above was washed with brine, and concentrated to an oil, which was separated by preparative TLC
(CH2CI2-MeOH = 50:1) to afford 0.45 g of a solid as the third crop of the titled product. The overall yield of the product, N, M dimethyl-3-hydroxy-4-amino-2-thiophenecarboxamide, is 2.32 g (89%) (MH+ = 187.0).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.20 O O O
`N S Step A `N S Br Step B _~N \ S/ Br ~/ I
IMeO W--< Ph Me0 N=< Ph HO NH2 Ph Step A
To the product from Preparative Example 13.19 Step D (1.56g) in CH2CI2 (55m1) was added potassium carbonate (1.8g) followed by dropwise addition of bromine (0.45ml). After 5hr of mixing, water (100ml) was added to the reaction and the layers were separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with CH2CI2, which was then washed with brine, saturated sodium bicarbonate, and brine again. The organic layer was dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified via is flash column chromatography (CH2CI2) to yield 1.6g of product (83%).
Step B
The product from above was reacted in the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.19 Step C to give the amine.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.21 O O O
Step A S Step B S
--N `S/ Br N X / Ph ~V/
MeO N= ( MeO N-<Ph HO NH2 Step A
To the product from Preparative Example 13.20, Step A (300mg) in THE (7ml) at -78 C was added a solution of n-BuLi (1.6M in hexanes, 0.54m1). After 1 hr, iodomethane (0.42m1) was added dropwise. After 3 hrs of stirring at -78 C, the reaction was warmed to room temperature overnight. Saturated ammonium chloride and water were added to the reaction and extracted with CH2CI2.
The organic layer was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate and brine, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by preparative plate chromatography (CH2CI2-MeOH = 70:1 to 50:1) to afford the product (111 mg, 43%).

Step B
The product from above was reacted in the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.19, Step E to give the amine.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.22 Step A S Step B S cl 'N X /j MeO NKPh MeO N Ph HO NH2 Ph Step A
To the product from Preparative Example 13.19 (400mg), Step D in CH2CI2-pyridine (14m1) was added N-chlorosuccinimide (220mg). The mixture was stirred for 5hr and then diluted with CH2CI2 and washed with water, saturated sodium bicarbonate and brine, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified via preparative plate chromatography (CH2CI2-MeOH = 50:1) to give 180mg of product (64%).

Step B
The product from above (274mg) was reacted in the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.19, Step E to give the amine (89mg, 58%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.23 0 O, 0 S Step A 0 S Step B 0 s Ho ) H N
Me0 Br Me0 Br Me0 Br O1 o1 O O S
Step C N / Ph Step D N
Meo N-=( HO NH2 Ph Step A
To a stirred solution of acid (630mg) from Preparative Example 13.19, Step B
in CH2CI2 (25m1) was added oxalyl chloride (235u1) followed by a catalytic amount of DMF (1 Oul). The mixture was stirred for 1 hr, then potassium carbonate (1.8g) was added followed by 3-amino-5-methylisoxazole (443mg). The reaction stirred overnight and was quenched with water (25m1). Layers were separated and the organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by preparative plate chromatography (CH2CI2) to afford the product (580mg, 78%, MH+=317,319).

Step B
The acid from the above (750mg) step was reacted following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.3, Step B to yield 625mg of product (80%, MH+=331).
Step C
The product from above was reacted following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.19, Step D to yield 365mg of product (53%) StepD
The product from above was reacted following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.19, Step E to give the amine product (MH+=254).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.25 OH
Step A O Step B
O F 3 \ /

F FF
N3 Step C
Ift-O

Step A
To a solution of 2-methylfuran (1g) in ether (30m1) was added n-BuLi (5.32m1) at -78 C. The reaction was warmed to room temperature and then refluxed at 38 C
for 1 hr. The reaction was cooled back down to -78 C where the fury) lithium was quenched with trifluorobutyraldehyde and let stir at room temperature overnight.
Saturated ammonium chloride added and extracted with ether. Purified via flash column chromatography to yield pure product (2g, 80%) Step B
The azide was prepared using the procedure from Preparative Example 75.75, Step B and the alcohol (1 g) from above and carried on crude to Step C below.
Step C
The amine was prepared using the procedure from Preparative Example 75.75, Step C to yield 400mg of an oil (53%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.26 O O Step A OH Step B
H \ C2F5 ` O/

N3 O Step C C2F5 O
C2F5 \ / H2N \ /
Step A
Perfluoroiodide (3.6ml) was condensed at -78 C. Ether (125ml) was added followed by the methyllithium.lithiumbromide complex (1.5M in ether, 18.4m1).
After 15min, a solution of 5-methylfuraldehyde (2.5m1) in ether was added dropwise.
The reaction was warmed to -45 C and let stir for 2hr. Saturated ammonium chloride (30m1) and water (30m1) were added and let stir at room temperature for 1 hr.
The io layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with CH2CI2. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 5.86g of product (100%).

Step B
The alcohol from above was reacted to form the azide using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 75.75 Step B.

Step The azide from above was reacted to form the racemic amine using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 75.75 Step C.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.27 O OH
Step A O Step B
/'~j H ~ ~ --' C2F5 O Step C C2F5 O Step D

C2F5 Step E Q2F5 100- N3~ , H2N

5 Step A
Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.26, Step A, the alcohol was prepared (100%).

Step B
10 To a solution of the alcohol (500mg) from step A above in CH2CI2 (20m1) was added N-methyl-morpholine monohydrate (575mg) and a catalytic amount of tetrapropyl ammonium perruthenate (76mg). After 3hr, the mixture was diluted with hexane (10ml) and filtered through a silica pad, rinsing with hexane: CH2CI2 (200m1).
The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give 350mg of product (70.7%) Step C
The ketone (1.19g) from Step B was dissolved in THE (9.5m1) and cooled to 0 C. A solution of S-methyl oxazoborolidine (1 M in toluene, 1 ml) followed by a solution of borane complexed with dimethylsulfide (9.5m1, 2M in THF) was added to the solution. The mixture was stirred at 0 C for 30min and continued at room temperature for 5hr. The mixture was cooled back down to 0 C and methanol (15m1) was added dropwise to the mixture. After 30min, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo to give an oily residue.

The residue was dissolved in CH2CI2 and washed with 1 N HCI, water, and brine. Dried with Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified via flash column chromatography (Hex/ CH2CI2, 1:1) to afford 1.14g of an oil (67%).
Step D
The alcohol (1.14g) from above was reacted to form the azide using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 75.75 Step B.

Step E
The azide (1.11g) from above was stirred with 10% Pd/C (280mg) in EtOH
(40m1) under a hydrogen gas atmosphere overnight. The reaction was filtered through celite, the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give 700mg of product (70%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.28 S O O Step A Step B Step C

NO2 NH2 NMs2 O N,OH NHZ
Step D S/ Step I g Step F S/

NHMs NHMs NHMs Step A
To a stirred solution of 1-(2-thienyl)-1-propanone (3g) in acetic anhydride (6ml) at 0 C was added dropwise a solution of fuming nitric acid in acetic acid (2m1 in 1 Oml).
After 30min, the reaction was warmed to room temperature and let stir for 5hrs where a solid precipitated out. Ice was added to the reaction and the solid was filtered. The solid was purified by flash column chromatography (Hex/ CH2CI2, 3:1 and 2:1) to yield 800mg of desired product (20%).

Step B
The above nitro-thiophene compound (278mg) was reduced using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 2, Step B to give 54mg of product (23%).

Step C
The above amine (395mg), TEA (1 ml) and methanesulfonylchloride (0.5ml) were combined in CH2CI2 (35m1) and stirred at room temperature for 1 hr. The reaction was quenched with saturated sodium bicarbonate (15m1). The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford product (854mg, 100%).

Step D
To the above product (854mg) in THE (25m1) was added dropwise a solution of tetrabutylammonium fluoride (1 M in THF, 2.8m1). The mixture was stirred overnight, then diluted with CH2CI2 (30ml), washed with ammonium chloride and brine, dried over over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford product (2.36g, >100%).

Step E
The ketone (2.36g) above was reacted via the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 88.2, Step B to yield 547mg of product (86.6%).

Step F
To the product from step E (310mg) in dimethoxyethane (12m1) was added dropwise a solution of LAH (1 M in ether, 3.8m1). The mixture was heated to reflux overnight. The reaction was cooled to room temperature, Si02 was added as well as water (1 ml) dropwise and let stir for 15min. The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentratred in vacuo. The crude product was purified by preparative plate chromatography (MeOH/ CH2CI2, 15:1) to give the amine product (40mg, 14%).

H2 Step A

K
NI-t Step B r ( N

Step A
3-Nitro-1,2-phenylenediamine(10 g), sodium nitrite (5.4 g) and acetic acid (20 ml-) were heated at 60 C overnight, then concentrated in vacuo, diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The product precipitated from the organic phase (5.7 g) as a solid and used directly in step B.

Step B
The product from Step A above (2.8 g) was stirred with 10% Pd/C (0.3 g) in MeOH (75 ml-) under a hydrogen gas atmosphere overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite and the filtrate concentrated in vacuo, to give the product (2.2 g, MH+=135).

K N Step A H K N Step B K N
Br Br Br Step C

I I I
NI'k Step E N. Step D
N /N /N N /N
HO NH2 HO NO2 Br NO2 Step A
N-methyl-4-bromopyrazole-3-carboxylic acid was prepared according to known methods, see: Yu. A. M.; Andreeva, M. A.; Perevalov, V. P.; Stepanov, V. I.;
Dubrovskaya, V. A.; and Seraya, V. I. in Zh. Obs. Khim. (Journal of General Chemistry of the USSR) 1982, 52, 2592, and refs cited therein.
Step B
To a solution of N-methyl-4-bromopyrazole-3-carboxylic acid (2.0 g), available from step A, in 65 mL of anhydrous DMF was added bromotripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate (PyBrop, 4.60 g), dimethyl amine (10 mL, 2.0 M in THF) and diisopropylethyl amine (5.2 mL) at 25 C. The mixture was stirred for 26 h, and concentrated under reduced pressure to an oily residue. This residue was treated with a 1.0 M NaOH aqueous solution, and extracted with ethyl acetate (50 mL x 4).
The organic extracts were combined, washed with brine, and dried with anhydrous Na2SO4. Removal of solvents yielded an oil, which was purified by preparative thin layer chromatography, eluting with CH2CI2-MeOH (20:1), to give 1.09 g of the amide product (48%, MH+ = 232.0).

StepC
To a solution of the amide (0.67 g), obtained from step B, in 8 mL of concentrated sulfuric acid at 0 C was added potassium nitrate (1.16 g) in small portions. The cooling bath was removed and the mixture was heated at 110 C
for 6 h. After cooling to 25 C, the mixture was poured into 80 mL of H2O, and an additional 20 mL of H2O was used as a rinse. The aqueous mixture was extracted with CH2CI2 (100 mL x 4). The combined extracts were washed with brine (50 mL), sat. NaHCO3 aqueous solution (50 mL), brine (50 mL), and dried with Na2SO4.
Evaporation of solvent gave an oil, which solidified on standing. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography, eluting with CH2CI2-MeOH (1:0, 50:1 and 40:1). Removal of solvents afforded 0.521 g (65%) of the product as a solid (MH+
= 277.1) Step D
The product (61 mg) obtained from step C was dissolved in 3 mL of THF. To this solution at - 78 C was added dropwise along the inside wall of the flask a 1.6 M
solution of n-butyl lithium in hexane. After 45 min, a solution of methyl borate (0.1 ml-) in THE (1.0 ml-) was added. After 1.5 h, a solution of acetic acid in THE
(0.25 mL, 1:10 v/v) was added to the cold mixture. Stirring was continued for 10 min, and a 30 wt % aqueous hydrogen peroxide solution (0.1 mL ) was added. An additional portion of hydrogen peroxide aqueous solution (0.05 ml-) was added 20 min later. The cooling bath was removed, and the mixture was stirred at 25 C for 36 h. The mixture was poured into 30 mL of H2O, and the aqueous mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (30 mL x 4). The extracts were combined, washed with brine (10 mL), 5%
NaHCO3 aqueous solution (10 ml-) and brine (10 mL). The organic layer was dried with Na2SO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure to a residue, which was then purified by preparative thin layer chromatography eluting with CH2CI2-MeOH
(20:1) to give the hydroxylated product (5 mg, 10%, MH+ = 215.3).

Step E
By treating the hydroxylated product of Step E with H2 under the conditions of 10% palladium on carbon in ethanol, one would obtain the desired hydroxyl-amino compound.

N^~ Step A N Step B

OH OH

V' ~
HO \ N02 Step C NO

O OH O OH

N~
Step D

O OH

Step A
Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 13, Step C except using the known compound, 4-methyl-pyrimidin-5-ol, the product can be prepared.
Step B
Following a similar oxidation procedure used in Preparative Example 15, Step A except using the compound from Step A above, the product can be prepared.
StepC
Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 11, Step A except using the compound from Step B above, the product can be prepared.

Step D
Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 12, Step F except using the compound from Step C above, the product can be prepared.

i rN
HO I Step A Step B

O OH OH

N N
I r l Step C I I

~N \ N02 N NH2 O OH O OH

Step A
Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 11, Step A except using the known 4-hydroxynicotinic acid, the product can be prepared.

Step B
Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 13, Step C except using the compound from Step A above, the product can be prepared.

Step C
Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 12, Step F except using the compound from Step C above, the product can be prepared.

O N O N
Step A

OH OH

O N
Step B V
)I- N I-12 OH
Step A
Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 13, Step C except using the compound from Step A above, the product can be prepared.

to Ste l? B
Stirring the compound from Step A above, a suitable Pt or Pd catalyst and EtOH under hydrogen atmosphere (1-4 atm) the product can be prepared.

N I-12 + - \ N OEt 0 OH Et0 OEt OH H
O
The product from Preparative Example 3 (14.6 g) dissolved in absolute EtOH
(100 ml-) was added dropwise over 4 hours to a stirred ethanolic (100 ml-) solution of diethylsquarate (19 mL, 128 mmol). After 5 days, the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo, and the resulting residue purified by column chromatography (silica gel, 0-5% MeOH/CH2CI2) gave the product (65%, MH+ =
305, mp = 178.6 C).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 19.1 )NNH2 -I?-- + N
N OMe OH
O OH Me OMe H
O

The amine from Prepartive Example 3 (5g) and dimethylsquarate (3.95g) in MeOH were stirred overnight. The precipitated product was filtered to give 6.32g of solid (78%, MH+=291.1) PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 20-23.14 Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 19 but using the amine from the Preparative Example indicated in the Table below, the cyclobutenedione intermediates were obtained.

Prep Ex. Amine from Product 1. Yield (%) Prep Ex. 2. MH+
4 1. 85%
O O 2. 333 N I N ):~ OEt O OH H
21 11 O O 1.44%
2.319 ~' .~

, N OEt 21.1 6 1. 9%
2. 291 H _ /N \ N OEt 22 2 1. 38%
2. 347 HO
N
N OEt O OH H

23 14 1. 51%
0 2. 259 N N OEt ~N-N\ H
H
23.1 10.1 0 0 1. 62%
I 2. 317 H~ N OEt O OH H
23.2 10.2 0 0 1. 61%
2. 319 HEN N OEt I
O OH H
23.3 12 N 1. 40%
I
O O 2. 330 N N OR

23.4 10.3 O 1. 42%
H
/N - OEt 2. 333 23.5 10.4 0 O 1. 40%
H
1 N ~ - 2. 333 /~ N OEt O OH H
23.6 10.5 H 0 O 1. 37%
N 2. 347 N OEt O OH H

23.7 13.2 CI 1. 39%
O O 2. 339 N OEt O OH H
23.8 13.1 Br 1. 42%
I O O 2. 383/385 N N
OEt O OH H
23.9 13.19 O O 1 . 51 %
2. 311 N S ` N OEt TO
HO Fi 23.10 13.20 Br O O 1. 67%
2. 389.1,390 N OEt O OH

23.11 13.3 Br O O 1. 52%
N I 2. 383/385 N OEt O OH H
23.12 13.21 O O 1. 76%
I i S \ _ 2. 325.1 N N OEt 23.13 13.22 CIO 0 1. 54%
N S
N Y=k OEt O OH H

23.14 13.23 0 0 1. 62%
O~ N N ):t 2. 378 N OEt HO H
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 23.16-23.24 Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 19 but using the amine from the Preparative Example indicated in the Table below, the cyclobutenedione intermediate products were obtained.

Prep Ex. Amine from Product Yield (%) Prep Ex.
23.16 13.11 0 O L 91%
F-F
Et0 N-~"O

23.17 13.12 0 0 F 81%
t0 F tF
E N O
H I

23.18 13.17 0 O %F 47%
%:~ F
Et0 N O\
O
23.19 13.27 0 0 F F F 21%

EtO N CIO
H

23.20 13.26 O O F F F 10%

F F
-to N 0 H I

23.21 13.25 49%
FFF
F

Et0 N O

23.22 13.13 0 0 80%

Et0 N O

23.23 13.15 O O QF3 Et0 N

23.24 13.16 O O CF3 64%

EtO N
H
Br II Step A
OH H
~O N O~N
H~ H~ N
O O
H
HCI.NH(- 'f Step B ~ II

Step A
To a solution of N-protected amino acid (1.5 g, 6.9 mmol) in CH2CI2 (25 ml-) at room temperature was added DIPEA (3.6 mL, 20.7 mmol), and PyBrop (3.4 g, 6.9 mmol) followed by MeNH2 (6.9 mL, 13.8 mmol, 2.0 M in CH2CI2). The resulting solution was stirred for 18 h at room temperature (until TLC analysis deemed the reaction to be complete). The resulting mixture was washed sequentially with 10% citric acid (3 x 20 mL), sat. aq. NaHCO3 (3 x 20 mL), and brine (3 x 20 mL). The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure.
The crude product was purified by flash chromatography eluting with CH2CI2/MeOH
(40:1) to afford 1.0 g (63% yield) of a solid.
Step B
To a round bottom charged with the N-protected amide (1.0 g, 4.35 mmol) (from Step A) was added 4N HCI/dioxane (10 mL) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h. The mixture was diluted with Et20 (20 ml-) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was treated with Et2O (2 x 20 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 0.72 g (-100 % yield) of crude product as the HCI salt. This material was taken on without further purification or characterization.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 25-33.1 Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 24 but using the commercially available N-protected amino acids and amines in the Table below, the amine hydrochloride products were obtained.

Prep Amino acid Amine Product 1.Yield (%) Ex.

NH3 1. 70%
H~H NHZ
CIHH2 N(' O
H ZN 1. 71%
H
26 0 CIHH2=NflN

27 N~ /oH 1. 66%
0 N,, 112N'o CIHH2 N
O I /

28 ~/ xoH H 1. 65%
H H2N % CIH.H2N N

29 1 ':fy) 1. 90%
~o H oH H2N N
o CIH.H2N
O
30 \/ I 1. 68%
Yo N (oR H2N I N \
70 CIHH2 Nll~y O =

31 ~~ = \_/ 1 1. 68%
/-o N if H H 2 N N
H 0 CIHH2=N~
O

1. 97%
H
32 H 0 H2N o CIHH2=N~ \
O

1. 97%
/C0- H = = H
33 H o H2N CIH.H2N(N
O
33.1 H 1.20%
o i = H N
2 CIH.H2N ( X" OH

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 33.2 OH Step A BOCHN(NH Step B H2NNH
BOCHN~ O O
O
HCI
Step A
BOC-valine (45mg) and PS-carbodiimide (200mg) were suspended in CH2CI2 (4m1). After addition of the CH2CI2-amine solution (0.138N, 1 ml), the mixture was shaken overnight. The solution was filtered and the resin was washedwith more CH2CI2, and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to yield the product, which was carried on directly in Step B.
Step B
The crude material from Step A was dissolved in 4N HCI/dioxane (2.5m1) and stirred for 2h. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo to yield the desired amine hydrochloride, which was used directly in the next step.
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 33.3-33.47 Following the procedure set forth in Example 33.2 but using the commercially available N-protected amino acids in the Table below, the amine hydrochloride products were obtained.

Prep Amino acid Amine Product Ex.
33.3 HCI

OH I / i / I \

H2N \
O
H,N

33.4 NR HCI

O H'~YOH
/
N / $

33.5 V~ = HCI
X.~H
'Ir OH o H 2N zV
~ = H

33.6 O HCI
x H -OH

H
H2N lp H2N _N
o 33.7 \- H2N HCI
x H II OH

H
H2N N ,o O

33.8 u i HCI
xH2N

O \
33.9 HCI
x ,J-HI " HN

H2N ( N \

33.10 x H2N \ HCI

IOH
N V
H

O N
33.11 HCI

>COxNOH H2N
H O H -HCI
33.12 0 OH H2N
XOxH O H2N N
O

33.13 0 N I HCI
X ~N
H2N,."

H \

33.14 / HCI

X AN OH H2N~0 V
H _ HBO

33.15 H2N HCI

H
I H2N~N
O
~ HCI
33.16 ~~\ I

/-~ _ H2N\ V N
O H TyOH = H
I N

33.17 HCI

H
H2N(N
O

33.18 HCI
\x/ Iu H2N \ I \/

O

\J(/ Iuo H2N CI
\O/~H/~OH H
H2N~N Cl 33.20 HCI

H2N ll X ~H~OH
N H2N(N \
O I~
N
33.21 cl HCI

X "H2N \ I CI
~N,-r H 41 H /

33.22 HCI

x0' N OOH H2N,-\II/H

33.23 HCI

\/
Ilu O 0', "0'!'N = H l=~-H N N

*'Y X
O O O
33.24 HCI~ /

~
T~ H H

33.25 i I HCI

H',~- H H
H2N(N N
O( 33.26 -- HCI

"2N H >(O 0 ' NOH N
H 0 H2N ~~r 33.27 O~ HCI

o H2N \ I \/ / O"' ~( IIII H
~oJ~H~0H H N N

33.28 o H2N N',10 -"~c X \
JL %~OH HZN 0 O
33.29 H2N HCI

H
O H~OH N
o H2N \
O
33.30 NO2 HCI

X H2N p N
O HOH H o H2N

33.31 I i HCI
HN
~( oII \/ \

o o N \

33.32 0 HCI
H2N"IINI%c ~/ IoII
XOJLNi'OH = H p H
o H2N(N~

33.33 H2N HCI

VV Io \~ I:Do >() 0H H
o H2N N
O I:b 33.34 F , HCI
o \. H2N I F
F H

33.35 X 0 - H
Nllr H H2N F H2N1\y N

33.36 H2N HCI

v V
x II\H- H = H

IOI
33.37 0 \ HCI

x ~ H~ H H0~
N""

33.38 \ HCI
ROAN

H

33.39 HCI

(' I
\}
\ /-HH
H2N(N
O
33.40 HCI

XA
H~ H H

O
33.41 - HCI

0-1-0 X0N--,,-OH

HZNO N

33.42 o~ o~

Iup ~/ H2N H2N N
Xp/\Np HCI 0 I
33.43 Y-0 HC
H2N XpH~.pH N \
p H2N
O
33.44 HCI

Xp'f \ HN \
p/\l ~rpH 7 H --0~
HO

33.45 HNJ HCI

O v \

33.46 HCI
Jp H2N \ I ~ /
Xp/ \H~pH H
OH H2N N \
O LOH
33.47 i I HCI
p H2N
XAH N
\ ( /
p H2N
O

Preparative Example 34 H Cl a) LiN(TMS)2 lw_ H2N
b) EtMgBr To a solution of 3- chlorobenzaldehyde (2.0 g, 14.2 mmol) in THE (5 mL) at 0 C was added LiN(TMS)2 (17.0 ml, 1.0 M in THF) dropwise and the resulting solution was stirred for 20 min. EtMgBr (6.0 mL, 3.0 M in Et20) was added dropwise and the mixture was refluxed for 24 h. The mixture was cooled to room temperature, poured into saturated aqueous NH4CI (50 mL), and then extracted with CH2CI2 (3 x 50 volumes). The organic layers were combined, concentrated under reduced pressure.
The crude residue was stirred with 3 M HCI (25 mL) for 30 min and the aqueous layer was extracted with CH2CI2 (3 x 15 mL) and the organic layers were discarded. The aqueous layer was cooled to 0 C and treated with solid NaOH
pellets until pH = 10 was attained. The aqueous layer was extracted with CH2CI2 (3 x 15 mL) and the organic layers were combined. The organic layer was washed with brine (1 x 25 mL), dried (Na2SO4), and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 1.6 g (66% yield) of the crude amine as an oil (MH+ 170). This material was determined to be >90% pure and was used without further purification.
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.1 H NO2 -_~ H cl 0~1 The aldehyde (3.5g) and conc. HCI (20m1) were combined and stirred overnight at 40 C. The reaction mixture was poured into cold water and extracted with ether, washed with satd. NaHCO3 and brine, dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 1.76g of product (55%) PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.2 o H H

cl Chlorine was bubbled into 100ml of CH2CI2 at 10 C. The aldehyde (3.73m1) was charged with 50m1 of CHCI3 and then cooled to 0 C. AIC13 was added portionwise, followed by the chlorine solution and let stir at room temperature overnight. The reaction was poured into 150m1 of ice and 50ml of 3N HCI and stirred for 30min. Organic layer was washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified via flash column chromatography (Hex/EtOAc 40/1) to yield 1.5g of pure product.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.3 0 ,OH
Step B NH2 Step A N I /
FgC I \ ~ F3C \ ~ F3C \
I
~

Step A
The ketone (3.25g) was reacted following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 88.2, Step B to give the oxime (3.5g, 99%).

Step B
The product from step A (1.2g) was stirred with AcOH (3m1) and Pd/C (10%, 300mg) in EtOH (40m1) under a hydrogen atmosphere overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The crude material dissolved in ether and washed with 2N NaOH, organic washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to give product (960mg, 86%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.4 OH O
Step A I Step B

Br Br EtO OEt CO/
Br Step C () O Step D O

Step A
To a suspension of NaH (1.45g) in DMF (25m1) under a nitrogen atmosphere was added p-bromophenol (5g) at 0 C. After stirring for 20min, BrCH2CH(OEt)2 (5.3m1) was added and the reaction was heated to reflux overnight. The solution was cooled and poured into ice water (80m1) and extracted with ether. The ether layer was washed with 1 N NaOH and brine, dried with MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 8.4g of crude product (100%) s Step B
To a solution of the product from Step A (8.4g) in benzene (50m1) was added polyphosphoric acid (10g). The mixture was heated at reflux for 4 hrs. The reaction was cooled to 0 C and poured into ice water (80ml) and extracted with ether.
The ether layer was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate and brine, dried with MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 4.9g of crude product (85%) Step C
To a solution of the product from Step B (2g) in ether (20m1) at -78 C was added t-BuLi dropwise. After stirring for 20min, DMF (950mg) was added dropwise and the mixture was stirred at -25 C for 3hrs and then warmed to room temperature overnight. Saturated ammonium chloride was added and the solution was extracted with ether. The ether layer was washed with brine, dried with MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 980mg of crude product (67%).

Step D
To a solution of aldehyde (400g) in ether (1 Oml) was added LiN(TMS)2 (1 M in THF, 3.3m1) at 0 C dropwise. The solution was stirred at 0 C for 30min and EtMgBr (3M in THF, 1.83m1) was added dropwise. The reaction was refluxed overnight, cooed to 0 C, quenched with saturated ammonium chloride and extracted with ether.
The ether was stirred with 3N HCI (20m1), then the aqueous layer was basified with NaOH pellets and extracted with ether. The ether layer was washed with brine, dried with MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 220mg of product (46%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.5 OH Step A O I \ O Br \ 0 Step B +
Eto OEt Br Br Br \

H "COZ Step D O
Step C / + + I \ /

H

Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 34.4 Steps A
through D, but using m-bromophenol (8g), both amines were formed and separated by preparative plate chromatography (63-656/o, MH{-=175).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.6 O
S
H --II q\/

To a solution of 3-methyl-thiophene (5g) in ether (50ml) was added dropwise a solution of n-BuLi (1.6M in hexane, 32m1). The mixture was stirred for 1.5hr at room temperature. DMF (5.1 ml) was then added and let stir overnight. The mixture was poured into saturated ammonium chloride and extracted with ether. The ether layer was washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified via flash column chromatography (EtOAc/Hex 20:1) to afford 5.27g of an oil (84%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.7 0 p OCH3 OCH3 O
H \ / Step H3Cp p Step B H3C H
Br O O Step qO/
Br Step A
To a solution of 4-bromo-2-furaldehyde (4g) in MeOH (75ml) was added trimethyl- orthoformate (3.8m1). A catalytic amount of p-toluene sulfonic acid (1 95mg) and the mixture was heated to reflux for 3.5hr. The reaction was cooled down and potassium carbonate was added. The mixture was filtered through a silica gel pad.
The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo, dissolved in CH2CI2 and filtered. The filtrate was again concentrated in vacuo to give 4.03g of product (80%).

Step B
To a solution of the product from Step A (2.02g) in THE (80m1) at -78 C was added dropwise a solution of n-BuLi (2.5M in hexanes, 4.4m1) and stirred for 1.5hr. A
solution of iodomethane (1.7ml) was added and let stir for 2.5hrs at -60 C.
The cooling bath was removed and saturated ammonium chloride was added and let stir for 10min. The layers were separated and the organic layer was washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to afford 1.34g of crude product.

Step C
The product from Step B (1.43g) was dissolved in acetone (50ml) and treated with a catalytic amount of p-toluene sulfonic acid (80mg). The mixture was heated to reflux for 2hr. The reaction was cooled down and solid potassium carbonate was added. The mixture was filtered through a silica gel pad and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give 1.246g of crude product.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.8 H3CO O NOa Step A _ Step B 0 H3CO J--( O
Step C H \ / Step D H

Step A
To a stirred solution of potassium t-butoxide (2.5g) in HMPA (20m1) was added 2-nitropropane (2ml) dropwise. After 5min, a solution of methyl-5-nitro-2-furoate (3.2g) in HMPA (8m1) was added to the mixture and stirred for 16hr. Water was added and the aqueous mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The EtOAc layer was washed io with water, dried with MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified by flash column chromatography (Hex/EtOAc, 6:1) to yield 3.6g of product (90%).

Step B
is To a solution of the product from Step A (3.6g) in toluene (16m1) was added tributyltin hydride (5.4m1) followed by AIBN (555mg). The mixture was heated to 85 C
for 3.5hr. After cooling, the mixture was separated by flash column chromatography (Hex/EtOAc, 7:1) to afford 2.06g of product (73%).

20 StepC
To a solution of product from Step B (2.05g) in THE (60m1) at 0 C was added a solution of LAH (1 M in ether, 12.8ml). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 30min. Water and 1 M NaOH was added until a precipitate formed, diluted with EtOAc, stirred for 30min and then filtered through a celite pad. The organic filtrate 25 was concentrated in vacuo to give 1.56g of product (93%).

Step D
To a solution of product from Step C (2.15g) in CH2CI2 (100ml) was added Dess-Martin oxidant (7.26g) in CH2CI2 (45m1) and stirred for 30min. The mixture was diluted with ether (200ml). The organic layer was washed with I N NaOH, water and brine, dried with MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give oil and solid. The material was extracted with ether and filtered. Some solid crystallized out from the filtrate, filtered again, and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give 2.19g of product.
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.9 NHZ
N OH Step A N N Step B N Step C Step D
O O OMe OWN N
Step A
To a solution of carboxylic acid (5g) in CH2CI2 (400m1) at 0 C was added N(OCH3)CH3.HCI (11.5g), DEC (15.1 g), HOBt (5.3g) and NMM (43m1) and stirred for 14hr. The mixture was diluted with CH2CI2 (100ml) and the organic layer was washed with 10% HCI, saturated sodium bicarbonate and brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to afford 5.74g of crude product (85%).

Step B
To a solution of iodoethane (0.56m1) in ether (5m1) at -78 C was added a solution of t-BuLi (1.7M in pentane, 8.3m1) dropwise. The mixture was warmed to room temperature for 1 hr and transferred to a 100ml round bottom charged with the product from Step A (1g) in THE (12m1) at -78 C. The mixture was stirred at -for 1 hr and at 0 C for an additional 2hr. 1 M HCI was added dropwise followed by CH2CI2. The layers were separated and the organic layer was washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to afford 620mg of product (76%).

Step C
To a solution of the product from Step B (620mg) in THF/MeOH (10:1) at 0 C
was added NaBH4 (250mg) in one portion. The mixture was stirred overnight at 0 C, concentrated in vacuo and the crude material was dissolved in CH2CI2 and washed with I N NaOH and brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to afford 510mg of product.

Step D
The above material was reacted in the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 75.75 Steps B and C to yield 170mg of amine product (28%).
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.10 CIH.H2N~ N

The above amine was made analogous to the procedures set forth in Patent W096/22997 p.56, but using ethylglycine instead of benzylglycine in the DCC
coupling.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.11 O
N02 Step A \ N02 Step B NH2 Fj:
Fil: 25 F

Step A
To the nitro compound (3.14g) and cyclohexylmethanol (1.14g) in THE (50m1) was added PPH3 (4.72g) and cooled to 0 C. Diisopropylazadicarboxylate (3.15ml) was added dropwise and let stir overnight. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo and purified via flash column chromatography (Hex/EtOAc, 30:1) to give product (3.3g), which was carried on directly to the next step.

Step B
io To the product from step A (3.3g) in EtOH (50ml) was added 10% Pd/C (1.7g) under a hydrogen atmosphere at 55psi and let stir overnight. The reaction was filtered through celite and concentrated in vacuo to give 3.2g of product.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.12 HO \ O CF3 Step A Step B O
HO O CF3 H `O/ CF3 Step A
A solution of acid (2g) in ether (20ml) was added dropwise to a suspension of LiAIH4 (350mg) in ether (15m1) at 0 C. The solution was refluxed for 3hr and stirred at room temperature ovenright. 5% KOH was added and reaction was filtered, extracted with ether, dried with MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the product (1.46g, 79%, MH+=166).

StepBB
To a solution of alcohol from above (1.46g) in CH2CI2 at room temperature was added Dess-Martin reagent (5.6g) portionwise and one drop of water and let stir over the weekend at room temperature. 10% Na2S2O3 was added and stirred for 20min, extracted with CH2CI2, washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to afford I. 1g of product (76%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.13 The above compound was prepared in the procedure set forth in EP Patent 0 555 153 Al.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.14 Br Ph H ~ H
O O
O O

The aldehyde (500mg) from above was reacted following the procedure set forth in the Preparative Example 13.4, Step A to yield 372mg of product (76%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 35-51.20 Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 34 but using the, commercially available aldehydes and Grignard reagents listed in the Table below, the amine products below were obtained.

Prep Aldehyde Grignard Amine 1.Yield (%) Ex. Reagent 2. MH+

35 F EtMgBr F 1. 65%
H H 2N I o 2. 154 i 36 0 0--*-, EtMgBr 1. 75%
H H2N 2. 180 37 1 EtMgBr 1. 78%
H H2N 2. 170 38 F3 EtMgBr F3 1. 34%
H I % H 2N I 2. 204 i 39 H EtMgBr H2N I 1. 68%
2. 150 40 H % EtMgBr H2N I 1. 40%
i 2. 220 H EtMgBr H2N F 1. 73%
41 2. 154 EtMgBr H ~ i CF3 H2N CF3 1. 52%
42 2. 220 EtMgBr H
H2N Nzt 0 1. 55%
43 2. 180 o EtMgBr H I/ H2N p 1. 55%
43 2. 180 o F3 EtMgBr H I i H N F3 1. 20%
2 2. 204 o EtMgBr H ~CH3 H2N aoCH3 1. 80%
45 2. 166 EtMgBr 46 H cF3 H2N I \ 1. 35%
CF3 2. 220 i-PrMgBr 47 H H2N \ 1. 20%
2. 150 48 0 oMe EtMgBr H I j H2N OMe 1. 77%

[M-NH2] + _ EtMgBr F
49 H \ H N \ F 1. 77%

2. 172 F
F

50 H EtMgBr H2N 1. 78%
2.[M-NH2]+ _ Q 1. 10%
51 H ll-r EtLi 2. 116 51.2 O 1. 37%
H /jo EtMgBr H2N i l 0 2. 161 51.3 1. 63%
H
Itz" 0 F EtMgBr H2N / F 2. 216 \ F

51.4 1. 71%
o EtMgBr H2N 2. 228 "

51.5 1. 89%
EtMgBr H2N 2. 168 " I \ I

F
51.6 1. 20%
EtMgBr H2N I 2. 228 " /o /

51.8 1. 36%
F
H EtMgBr H2N F 2. 222 51.10 0 1. 95%
MgBr H2N 0 2. 152.1 H ~011 51.11 1. 61%
H-Al CI O
/ OH EtMgBr H2N % 2. 138.1 OH MH+-51.12 1. 70%
--I I " CIO N EtMgBr H2N 2. 184.1 11 N-51.18 0 1. 42%
H ),-a EtMgBr H2N 2. 147 [M-NH2]+

51.19 1. 67%
ci EtMgBr H2N ci 2. 204 Q
1,41-0 cl 51.20 1. 33%
" \ cl EtMgBr H2N ci 2. 188 '~ F
aF
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 51.25 - 51.31 Following the procedure set forth in Example 34 but using the commercially available aldehydes and Grignard reagents listed in the Table below, the amine products were obtained.

Prep Aldehyde Grignard Amine Yield (%) Ex. Reagent 51.25 20%
EtMgBr H2N
H N
51.26 77%

MgBr 51.27 (34.2) 51%
o EtMgBr O
o H2N
H CI
CI
51.28 (78.1) 56%
O

H N BrMg H2N iN

51.29 (78.1) 54%
io O, H N MgBr H2N \ !N

51.30 (34.12) 80%
O F EtMgBr H2N I O FF

F

51.31 10%

H MgBr II

HO,,~
Step A

F3C I-TOSI, F3C

HO,,.,,, N F3 I Step B S
F3C S ~ H2N

s Step A

A mixture of 2-(trifluoroacetyl)thiophene (2 mL, 15.6 mmol), hydroxylamine hydrochloride (2.2 g, 2 eq), diisopropylethylamine (5.5 mL, 2 eq) and MeOH (50 ml-) to was stirred at reflux for 48-72 hrs, then concentrated in vacuo. The residue was diluted with EtOAc, washed with 10% KH2PO4 and dried over Na2SO4 (anhydrous).
Filtration and concentration afforded the desired oxime (2.9 g, 96%) which was used directly in Step B without further purification.

15 Step B

To a mixture of the product from Step A above in TFA (20 mL) was added Zn powder (3 g, 3 eq) portionwise over 30 min and stirred at room temperature overnight.
The solid was filtered and the mixture reduced in vacuo. Aqueous NaOH (2 M) was 20 added and the mixture was extracted several times with CH2CI2. The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated to afford the desired product (1.4 g, 50%).

Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 52 but using the commercially available ketones listed in the Table below, the following amines were obtained.

Prep Ketone Amine 1.Yield (%) Example 2. MH+

1. 11%
53 S H2N S 2. 128 / ~~

1. 33%
54 S 2. 142 1. 49%
55 2. 156 1. 5%
56 S 2. 154 S

1. 47%
57 , 2. 174 H2N ~

1. 71%
58 S , 2. 190 O 1.78%
59 S %N 2. 191 1. 80%
S 2. 190 1. 9%
61 S 2. 156 To a cooled (0-5 C) suspension of L-a-(2-thienyl)glycine (0.5 g) and LiBH4 (2M
in THF, 3.8 ml-) in anhydrous THE (10 mL) was slowly added a THE (5 ml-) solution of 10 iodine (0.8 g). After stirring at room temperature for 15 min, the mixture was stirred at relux overnight. After cooling to room temperature, MeOH was added dropwise until gas evolution ceased and after 30 min, the mixture was evaporated. The oily residue was stirred in 20 mL KOH for 4 hrs, diluted with brine and extracted with EtOAc.

The organic phase was dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford a crude mixture. Purification by flash column chromatography (50%
EtOAc/ CH2CI2, silica) afforded the product (0.3 g, 63%, MH+ = 144).

CeCl3-7H20 was dried at 140-150 C for 22 hr. To this solid was added THE
(80 mL, anhydrous) and after stirring for 2 hr, the suspension was cooled to -and to it was added methyl lithium over 30 min. After stirring for an additional 30 min 2-thiophenecarbonitrile dissolved in anhydrous THE (4.5 mL) was added and the resulting mixture stirred for an additional 4.5 hr at -78 C. Concentrated aqueous NH3 (25 mL) was added and the mixture was warmed to room temperature and filtered through celite. The filtrate was extracted with dichioromethane, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford a crude mixture.
Purification by flash column chromatography (5% MeOH, CH2CI2, silica) afforded the desired product (1.2 g, 62%).

Step A Step C
(r-H
-~ Step B
F F
HN'"OH
Step D F

F

Step A
To a solution of (D)-valinol (4.16 g, 40.3 mmol) in CH2CI2 (60 mL) at 0 C was added MgSO4 (20 g) followed by dropwise addition of 3-fluorobenzaldehyde (5.0 g, 40.3 mmol). The heterogenous solution was stirred at 0 C for 2h and was allowed to warm to room temperature and stir overnight (14h). The mixture was filtered and the drying agent was washed with CH2CI2 (2 x 10 mL). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 8.4 g (100%) of an oil which was taken onto the next step without further purification.

Step B
To a solution of the imine (8.4 g, 40.2 mmol) from Step A in CH2CI2 (60 ml-) at room temperature was added Et3N (6.2 mL, 44.5 mmol) followed by dropwise addition of TMSCI (5.7 mL, 44.5 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 6h at room temperature whereupon the ppt that had formed was filtered off and washed with CH2CI2 (2 x mL). The combined filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure and was taken up in Et20/hexane (1:1/150 mL). The precipitate was filtered off and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 10.1 g (89%) of the protected imine as an oil. This material was taken onto the next step without further purification.

Step C
To a solution of Etl (4.0 g, 25.6 mmol) in Et20 (40 ml-) at -78 C was added t-BuLi (30.1 mL, 51.2 mmol, 1.7 M in pentane) and the mixture was stirred for 10 min.
The mixture was warmed to room temperature, stirred for 1 h, and was recooled to -40 C. A solution of the imine (6.0 g, 21.4 mmol) from Step B in Et20 (30 mL) was added dropwise via addition funnel to afford a bright orange mixture. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1.5 h at -40 C then 3M HCI (50 mL) was added and the mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature. Water (50 mL) was added and the layers were separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with Et20 (2 x 30 mL) and the organic layers were combined and discarded. The aqueous layer was cooled to 0 C and carefully treated with solid NaOH pellets until pH = 12 was attained.
The aqueous layer was extracted with Et20 (3 x 30 mL) and the combined layers were washed with brine (1 x 30 mL). The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 4.8 g (94% yield) of the amine as an oil. This material was taken on crude to the next step without further purification.
Step D
To a solution of amine (4.5 g, 18.8 mmol) from Step C in MeOH (80 mL) at room temperature was added MeNH2 (25 mL, 40% in water) followed by addition of a solution of H5106 (14.0 g, 61.4 mmol) in H2O (25 mL). The heterogenous mixture was stirred for 1.5 h (until the reaction was complete by TLC) and the precipitate was filtered off. The resulting filtrate was diluted with water (50 ml-) and the mixture was extracted with Et20 (4 x 60 mL). The combined organic layers were concentrated to a volume of -30 mL whereupon 3M HCI (75 mL) was added. The mixture was stirred overnight (1 2h at room temperature) after which the mixture was concentrated to remove the volatiles. The aqueous layer was extracted with Et20 (3 x 40 mL) and the organic layers were discarded. The aqueous layer was cooled to 0 C and was carefully treated with solid NaOH pellets until pH -12 was reached. The aqueous layer was extracted with Et20 (3 x 60 mL) and the combined organic layers were dried (MgS04). The organic layer was concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 2.8 g (97% yield) of the desired amine as an oil [MH 154]. This compound was proven to be >85% pure by 1H NMR and was used crude in the subsequent coupling step.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 65-75.10 Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 64 but using the commercially available aldehydes, amino alcohols, and organolithium reagents in the Table below, the optically pure amine products in the Table below were obtained.
Prep Aldehyde Amino Organo Product 1.Yield (%) Ex. Alcohol lithium 2. MH+
65 EtLi 1. 62%
H H2N H H2N 2. 154 F F

EtLi 1. 70%
66 H H2N OH H2N aloo 2. 154 F F

0 ~i V 67 1. 54%
H N 2. 166 F F
68 >-Li 1. 67%
H H2N OH H2N 2. 166 F F
69 EtLi 1. 67%
F 2. 154 1. 42%
70 0 EtLi 2. 142 1. 36%
71 0 EtLi 2. 142 H

1. 62%
72 0 Li 2. 148 O \ 1. 27%
73 H S t-BuLi 2. 256 O \ 1. 15%
74 H t-BuLi 2. 164 O F F F F 1. 7%
75 F F H 2. 204 Li H2N

75.1 1. 65%
H EtLi 2. 123 +
H2N OH H2N [M-NH2]

75.2 1. 62%
H EtLi 2. 123 H N OH H2N / [M-NH2]+

75.3 0 1. 93%
H S EtLi H2N 2. 139 / H2 OH [M-NH2]{

75.4 0 1. 50%
S tBuLi 2. 167 H / HZ OH H2N [M-NH2]+

75.5 (34.6) 4 1. 48%
0 tBuLi = 2. 167 H
I',- RI/ / S H2N OH H2N S [M-NH2]+

75.6 (34.6) 1. 97%
O EtLi H2N 2. 139 H H2 OH % [M-NH2]+
75.7 (34.6) VI- 1. 87%
O iPrLi 2. 153 S HZ OH H2N S [M-NH2]+
H

75.8 (34.6) p 1. 94%
O Li 2. 151 H S H2N OH H2N S [M-NH2]+

75.9 (34.8) 1. 75%
O = EtLi H N O 2. 151 +
H2N OH 2 [M-NH2]

75.10 (34.8) 1. 30%
Q tBuLi 2. 179 s H2N OH H2N O [M-NH2]+
"

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 75.11-75.59 Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 64 but using the prepared or commercially available aldehydes, amino alcohols, and organolithium reagents in the Table below and carrying the amine on crude, the optically pure amine products in the Table below were obtained.

Prep Aldehyde Amino Organo Product Yield (%) Ex. Alcohol lithium 75.11 0 52%
H

75.12 0 50%
0 ~ Li 75.13 0 \ / 57%
o -_ iPrLi H

75.14 0 54%
iPrLi 75.15 0 58%
H S iPrLi 75.16 0 61%
H S

75.17 72%
H S EtLi =
/ H2 %/-\ H2N S

75.18 68%
H S
S

/
I

75.19 77%
H s iPrLi 75.20 15%
H t-BuLi 75.21 50%
H McLi H2N s 75.22 23%
H EtLi H2N
lei 75.24 0 20%
H EtLi H2N

75.27 O 65%
H O~ EtLi H2JN0> H

2N OH 75.28 0 61%

H I / iPrLi 75.29 0 90%
H F EtLi F

F
F
75.30 62%
H2N iPrLi O

75.31 O 43%
F iPrLi F
H ' H2OH H2N I

75.32 0 50%
H Li D

O_J O
O-J
75.33 e 0 50%
1Li H
F

75.34 0 4 51%
F tBuLi 75.35 51%
H MeLi H2N 0 75.36 0 57%
g tBuLi H
N-/ H2N~~OH H2N' s II
75.37 \ 60%
O tBuLi Is //
75.38 / 73%
O EtLi 75.39 48%
H MeLi H2N I o 75.41 .4 V 52%
H)~ Li 75.42 40%
O EtLi H I \ H2N OH S
S
75.43 4 20%
O tBuLi S

75.44 0 79%
H o t-BuLi 75.45 0 55%
H iPrLi 75.46 (75.57) \ 39%
O tBuLi o, H2N OH H2N ON
H I N

75.47 (75.57) 55%
O iPrLi ~N
I ~ N
H

75.48 (75.57) 34%
O Li H I /N

75.49 (34.7) / 61%

A EtLi I o 75.50 (34.7) 25%
O tBuLi 75.51 (34.2) \ 33%
0 iPrLi Y/ /
CI Cl 75.52 (34.2) 30%
O tBuLi Y//
Cl CI
75.53 (34.2) 39%
O EtLi H
I I ry// O H2NOH H2N
Cl Cl 75.54 (34.2) 38%

P

Cl Cl 75.55 O 64%
EtLi H ~

75.56 0 46%
EtLi H

75.57 (75.57) 62%

=
r-\ EtLi H2N O\

H I /, 75.58 O \ 24%
H S iPrLi N-D/
75.59 (34.1) 70%
O EtLi O
H C C1 H2N "OH H2N / Cl PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 75.75 O H
Step A Step B
H \ / S \ /
Br Br 0 Step C or D 0 Br Br Step A
To a solution of aldehyde (2.5g) in ether (50ml) at 0 C was added EtMgBr (4.56ml) dropwise. The heterogenous mixture was stirred for 2hr at 0 C and then poured into a beaker of saturated ammonium chloride (25ml), ice and CH2CI2 (30ml).
After the biphasic mixture stirred for 10min, the organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to afford the product (2.41g, 95%) Step To a solution of alcohol from Step A above (1 g) in toluene at room temperature was added DPPA. The mixture was cooled to 0 C and DBU was added and let stir for 12hr at room temperature. The layers were separated and the organic layer was washed with water, 1 N HCI and dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Purified by preparative plate chromatography (hexane/EtOAc 20/1) to give the product (840mg, 75%).

Step C
To a solution of azide (730mg) from Step B above in THE (7m1) was added PPh3 (1g). The heterogenous solution was stirred for 12hr, whereupon water (1.5m1) was added. The mixture was refluxed overnight, cooled to room temperature and concentrated in vacuo. Ether and 1 N HCI were added to the residue. The aqueous layer was cooled to 0 C, basified with NaOH pellets and extracted with ether.
The ether layer was dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to afford the product (405mg, 62%).
Step D
To a solution of azide in THE at -10 C was added LiAIH4 portionwise. The heterogenous solution was stirred at room temperature for 1 hr and then refluxed for 4hr. The solution was cooled to 0 C and water, 2M NaOH and ether were added to the reaction. The mixture was filtered through a celite pad. The filtrate was treated with 3N HCI. The aqueous layer was cooled to 0 C, basified with NaOH pellots and extracted with ether. The ether layer was dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to afford the product.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 75.76-75.90 Following a similar procedure set forth in Preparative Example 75.75, and using the reduction procedure indicated, the following amines were obtained.

Prep Aldehyde Reducing Product Ex. Step % Yield 75.76 D 43%

O H2N \ O
H
75.77 O O C 36%
O

\
75.78 0 D 32%

CI
)I- sz 75.79 0 C 42%

/
75.80 D 56%

S S
75.81 0 D 35%

75.82 0 C 13%

H
O Br H2N Br 75.83 O C 42%
o / H N I O

Cl 75.84 C 39%

F
F F
F
F F
75.85 o cI C CI 26%
i z \ / -"'f 75.86 o F F C F F 25%
H o - F _ F

75.87 0 C 14%

HA IS H N S
N 2 NJ!
75.88 (34.14) C 49%

75.89 (34.13) C F 34%
O F O F

75.90 0 C 44%
H IO O

Br Br The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in J. Med. Chem. 1996, 39, 3319-3323.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 76.1 O Step A O Step B

Br Br O
O Step C CIHH2N
BOCHN

S
S

Step A
To a solution of amine from Preparative Example 75.90 (2.22g) in CH2CI2 (50ml) at 0 C was added TEA (3.03m1) followed by BOC2O (2.85g). The heterogenous mixture was allowed to stir at room temperature overnight. 10%
Citric to acid was added to the reaction and the layers were separated. The organic layer was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, brine and dried with Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified by flash column chromatography (Hex/EtOAc 10:1) to afford 2.7g of an oil (81 %).

Step B
Following the procedure from Preparative Example 13.4, Step A, but using the product from Step A above (450mg) and 3-thiophene boronic acid (284mg), the product was prepared (325mg, 71 %).

Step To the product from Step B (325g) was added 4M HCI in dioxane (1.31 ml) and let stir for 1 hr. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo and taken up in CH2CI2 and concentrated in vacuo again. This procedure was repeated 5 times to afford a semisolid (89%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 76.2-76.3 Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 76.1, but using the commercially available boronic acids, the indicated amines were prepared.
Prep Ex. Boronic Acid Product Yield (%) 76.2 70%

CIH.H2N
B(OH)2 N
76.3 35%
(HO)2B C N O
CIH.H2N

O
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 76.10 OH
Step A 0 Step B

Br Br Br Step C 0 Step D o --, N3 H2N \
Br Br Step A
The product from Preparative Example 75.75, Step A (2.5g) was reacted via the Preparative Example 13.11, Step B to give the ketone (1.93g, 78%).

Step B
To a solution of ketone from Step A above (500mg) in THE (5ml) at 0 C was added S-2-methyl-CBS-oxazaborolidine (0.98m1) dropwise followed by BH3.Me2S
(1.48m1). The mixture was stirred at 0 C for 2hr and was allowed to warm to room temperature and stir overnight. The mixture was cooled to 0 C and treated with MeOH (1 Oml). After stirring for 20min, the reaction was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in CH2CI2 and washed with 1 M HCI, saturated sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo.
The crude material was purified by preparative plate chromatography (Hex/EtOAc 4:1) to afford 650mg of an oil (89%).

Step C
The chiral alcohol from Step B above was reacted via the Preparative Example 75.75 Step B to give the azide.

Step D
The azide from Step C above was reacted via the Preparative Example 75.75 Step C to give the amine product.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 76.11 O

Br The desired compound was prepared as in Preparative Example 76.10, but using the R-2-methyl-CBS-oxazaborolidine in step B.

N
The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in J. Med. Chem. 1996, 39, 3319-3323.

The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in Chem. Pharm. Bull. 1991, 39, 181-183.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 78.1 The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in J. Organometallic Chem. 1998, 567, 31-37.

The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in Chem. Pharm. Bull. 1991, 39, 181-183.

N
The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in a) Synthesis 1987, 998-1001, b) Synthesis 1996, 641-646 and c) J.
Med. Chem. 1991, 34,2176-2186.

H2N J--- (1-9 N
The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in a) Synthesis 1987, 998-1001, b) Synthesis 1996, 641-646 and c) J.
Med. Chem. 1991, 34, 2176-2186.

i H 2N \

The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in J. Med. Chem. 1988, 31, 2176-2186.

a) CICO2Et, Et3N
H b) NaN3, H2O
0 c) t-BuOH, toluene H2N
d) 3M HCI, neutralize To a solution of carboxylic acid (1.5 g, 7.89 mmol) in H20/acetone (1:10/12 mL
total) at 0 C was added Et3N (1.43 mL, 10.3 mmol) followed by addition of ethyl chloroformate (0.83 mL, 8.68 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred for 30 min after which a solution of NaN3 (0.77g, 11.8 mmol) in H2O (2 mL) was added dropwise.
The resultant heterogenous mixture was stirred for I h at 0 C, then cold water (5 mL) and Et20 (10 ml-) were added. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with Et20 (2 x 10 mL). The organic layers were combined, toluene (20 mL) was added, and the organic layers were dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under io reduced pressure to a volume of 20 mL. t-BuOH (5 mL) was added and the mixture was refluxed for 12h. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was taken up in 3M HCI (30 mL) and was heated at reflux for 12h.
The mixture was cooled to room temperature and extracted with Et2O (3 x 15 mL).
The aqueous layer was cooled to 0 C and solid NaOH pellets were added until pH -was reached. The aqueous layer was extracted with Et2O (3 x 30 mL) and the combined organic layers were dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 0.78 g (61 % yield) of an oil [MH+ 162]. This material was used without further purification.

HO ~
O I / H2N \

The corresponding cyclopropyl analog was prepared according to the procedure outlined in Preparative Example 83.

H

The corresponding cyclohexyl analog was prepared according to the procedure outlined in Preparative Example 83.

We The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in J. Org. Chem. 1978, 43, 892-898.

O O O O
H N + - 10- 2 EtO ):~ N
"~~O Et0 OEt H O
A mixture of (R)-(+)phenylpropanolamine (8.2 g), 3,4-diethoxy-3-cyclobutene-1,2-dione (10 g) and absolute EtOH (75 ml-) was stirred at 0-25 C for 12 hrs.
Filtration and concentration of the filtrate gave a syrup which was chilled in the freezer to give a solid. Trituration of the solid with diethyl ether gave the desired product (10.5 g, 71 %, MH+ = 260).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 87.1 O o O 0 H2N Me, H
Meo OMe (R)-1-phenyl propylamine (4.82m1) and 3,4-dimethoxy-3-cylclobutene-1,2-dione (5.03g) were combined in MeOH (40m1) and stirred overnight. Reaction concentrated in vacuo and purified via flash column chromatography (MeOH/CH2CI2, 1:40) to yield 2.75g of product (31%, MH+=246).

i0 O O O O
H2N EtO ):~O EtO N\
H

A mixture of (S)-(+)-3-methyl-2-butylamine (3.0 g), 3,4-diethoxy-3-cyclobutene-1,2-dione (5 g) and absolute EtOH (100 mL) was stirred at 0-25 C for 12 hrs.
Filtration and concentration of the filtrate gave a syrup which solidified upon dilution with Et2O. Trituration of the solid with diethyl ether gave the desired product as a solid (4.4 g, 72%, MH+ = 212).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 88.1 H2N 0 +
EtO N 0 EtO OEt H

A mixture of amine from Preparative Example 75.1 (370mg), 3,4-diethoxy-3-cyclobutene-1,2-dione (0.39ml) and absolute EtOH (5m1) was stirred at room temperature overnight. Purification by preparative plate chromatography (3%
EtOH/CH2CI2) afforded the desired product (263mg, 37%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 88.2 OH
S Step A 0 Step B N

Step C Step D CF3 H2N \ ~ S
Et0 H
H
Step A
2-Methylthiophene (3g) was dissolved in THE and cooled to -40 C. N-butyllithium (2.5M in hexane,12.24ml) added dropwise and let stir at -40 C for 30min.
CuBr.(CH3)2S (6.29g) added and let warm to -25 C where the trifluoroaceticanhydride, (4.32ml) was added. The reaction was stirred at -15 C over the weekend. The io reaction was quenched with saturated ammonium chloride and extracted with EtOAc.
The organic layer washed with brine, dried with MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 4.59g of an oil (78%).

Step B
is The product from Step A (4.58g), hydroxylamine hydrochloride (3g), sodium acetate (4.4g), EtOH (75m1) and H2O (7.5m1) were combined and heated to 75 C
overnight. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo , taken up 1 N HCI, extracted with ether, dried with MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 4.58g of the product (93%, MH+=210).

Step C
The product from Step B above (4.5g) was dissolved in TFA (40ml) and cooled to 0 C. Zn powder (4.2g) was added portionwise and let reaction warm to room temperature and stir overnight. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo, taken up in 1 N NaOH, extracted with ether, dried with MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 3.43g of the product (80%).

Step D
The product from Step C (526mg), 3,4-diethoxy-3-cyclobutene-1,2-d!one (0.4m1) and absolute EtOH (1 Oml) was stirred at room temperature overnight.
Purification by preparative plate chromatography (10% EtOAc/Hex) to give 178mg of product (21 %, MH+=320).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 88.3 EtO N
H
Following a similar procedure as described in Preparative Example 88.2, but instead using 2-methylfuran, the above cyclobutenedione intermediate was prepared.
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 88.4 O

H2N O +
/ MeO N-"1:10 MeO OMe H 20 The amine from Preparative Example 75.1 (973mg) and the dimethoxysquarate (870mg) were dissolved in MeOH (20ml) and stirred for 3 days. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo and purified via flash column chromatography (MeOH/CH2CI2, 1 %) to yield 325mg of product (19%, MH+=249.8).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 88.5 O
O O

H2N + GO/
Me0 N
MeO OMe H [0~

The amine from Preparative Example 75.9 (323mg) and the dimethoxysquarate (426mg) were dissolved in MeOH (10ml) and stirred over the weekend. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo and purified via flash column chromatography (MeOH/CH2CI2, 1:20) to yield 407mg of product (57%, MH+=235.8).

Step A
HCI.H2N > H2N

SOH -OMe To a solution of KH (0.45 g, 11.3 mmol) in THE (15 ml-) at room temperature was added amine hydrochloride (0.85 g, 5.1 mmol) portionwise to afford a heterogenous reaction mixture. The mixture was allowed to stand overnight (12h) and Mel (0.32 mL, 5.1 mmol) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 6h after which the mixture was carefully poured into cold brine (125 mL). The mixture was extracted with Et20 (3 x 25 mL) and the organic layers were combined. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford the crude product as an oil. This material was carried on crude to the coupling step without further purification or characterization.
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 89.1 OH O-H2N J H2N ---~

To a solution of KH (1.1g) in THE (20m1) at room temperature was added (R)-2-amino-1-butanol 48m1) dropwise to afford a heterogenous mixture. The mixture was allowed to stand overnight (18hr) and then Mel (1.59m1) was added dropwise.
The mixture was stirred for 4hr after which brine was added. Extracted with ether, dried with K2CO3, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford 1.75g of an oil.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 89.2 JCOH J O-To a solution of KH (1.1g) in THE (20m1) at room temperature was added (S)-2-amino-1-butanol 48m1) dropwise to afford a heterogenous mixture. The mixture was allowed to stand overnight (1 8hr) and then Mel (1.59m1) was added dropwise.
The mixture was stirred for Or after which brine was added. Extracted with ether, dried with K2CO3, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford 1.75g of an oil.

Step A
HCI.H2N > H2N IY
OH OMe The corresponding cis analog was prepared in an analogous fashion utilizing the procedure described in Preparative Example 89. This material was also used without further purification.

zzts.
The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in J. Org. Chem. 1987, 52, 4437-4444.

The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn. 1962, 35, 11-16.

a) NH2OH-HCI, NaOH
b) LIAIH4 The desired amine was prepared from the corresponding ketone according to is standard methods previously described in a) Synthesis 1987, 998-1001, b) Synthesis 1996, 641-646 and c) J. Med. Chem. 1991, 34, 2176-2186.

a) NH2OH=HCI, NaOH >6 b) LiAIH4 The desired amine was prepared from the corresponding ketone according to standard methods previously described in a) Synthesis 1987, 998-1001, b) Synthesis 1996, 641-646 and c) J. Med. Chem. 1991, 34, 2176-2186.

XCN Step A
NC
Step-B" N- Step C_ H2N
Li Me Me Step A
Lithium hexamethyldisilylazide (34 mL, 1M in THF) was added dropwise to a -78 C THE (20 mL) solution of isobutyronitrile (2.8 mL). After 40 min, cyclopropylmethylbromide (5 g) was added and the mixture warmed to and stirred at 25 C overnight. After cooling to 0 C, 1 M HCI (aq) was added and the mixture was extracted with diethyl ether, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo at 0 C to give the desired product (4.5 g).

Step B
Methyl Lithium (17 mL, 1.4 M in Et2O) was added to the product from Step A
above (1.5 g) in Et20 (anhydrous) at 0 C. The mixture was stirred at 0-25 C
overnight, then diluted with 3M HCI (aq), extracted with CH2CI2, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated in vacuo at 0 C and used directly in Step C.

Step C
The product from Step B above was added to a slurry of NaBH4 (1.4 g) in isopropanol (50 ml-) at 0 C, then the mixture was stirred at reflux for 8 hr and at room temperature for 48 hrs. Water was added and the mixture was stirred for 30 min, then extracted with diethyl ether, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was diluted with CH2CI2 and extracted with 3M HCl. The organic phase was discarded and the aqueous phase was basified with NaOH (aq) and extracted with CH2CI2. Drying over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtering, and concentration in vacuo gave the desired compound (0.5 g).

S
Boc Step A S Step B
N, N
CI + I
H
J
Boc NH
O O
St ep D_ g Step C S N" q N~

O O OH

Step A
2-Thiophenecarbonyl chloride (2.OmL, 18.7mmol) was dissolved in IOOmL
dichioromethane. After addition of diisopropylethylamine (4.1 mL, 23.4mmol) and Boc-piperazine (3.66g, 19.7mmol), the mixture was stirred for 4h at room temperature.
The resulting mixture was put into water (500mL) and acidified with 3N HCI to pH-1.
Extraction with dichloromethane (2xlOOmL) and drying over sodium sulfate resulted in sufficiently pure product that was used in the next step without any further purification.
1H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 1.60 (s, 9H), 3.29 (dd, 4H), 3.69 (dd, 4H), 7.23 (dd, 1 H), 7.49 (d, 1 H), 7.79 (d, 1 H).

Step B
The crude material from Step A was dissolved in trifluoroacetic acid/dichioromethane (75mL, 4/1). After stirring for 2h, the reaction mixture was put into 1 N sodium hydroxide (400mL). Extraction with dichloromethane (2X1 OOmL) and drying over sodium sulfate resulted in sufficiently pure product that was used in Step C without any further purification. 1H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 2.81 (dd, 4H), 3.63 (dd, 4H), 7.21 (dd, 1 H), 7.46 (d, 1 H), 7.82 (d, 1 H).

Step C
The crude material (3.50g, 17.8mmol) from Step B was dissolved in dichloromethane (1 OOmL). After addition of diisopropylethylamine (18.7mL, 107mmol), 3-nitrosalicylic acid (3.3g, 18.Ommol), and PyBrOP (10.4g, 22.3mmol), the resulting mixture was stirred over night at room temperature before being put into I N
sodium hydroxide (200mL). Extraction with dichloromethane (2x200mL) removed all PyBrOP by-products. The aqueous phase was acidified with 3N HCI and subsequently extracted with dichloromethane (3x 100mL). The combined organic phases of the acidic extraction were dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated, and finally purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol = 10/1) to yield the desired product (2.31g, 34 % over 3 steps). 1H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 3.30-3.90 (m, 8H), 7.10-8.20 (m, double signals due to E/Z-isomers, 6H), 10.82 (s, 1 H).

Step D
The nitro-compound (2.3g, 6.4mmol) from Step C was dissolved in methanol (5OmL) and stirred with 10% Pd/C under a hydrogen gas atmosphere over night.
The reaction mixture was filtered through Celite and washed thoroughly with methanol.
Finally, the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol = 10/1) to yield the desired product (1.78g, 84%).

NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 3.30-3.90 (m, 8H), 7.22 (m, 2H), 7.55 (d, 1 H), 7.71 (d, 1 H), 7.88 (d, 1 H), 8.15 (d, 1 H), 10.85 (bs, 1 H).

O O O
(LOH +H ^N,Boc Step A N N Step B IN_ N~
v I N'Boc ~NH

O O
Step C (N N") / Step D ;N_I- N ) ~N ~ I N02 `
I v' N NHZ

Step A
Picolinic acid (3.0g, 24.3mmol) was suspended in SOCI2 (15mL). After addition of dimethylformamide (5 drops), the reaction mixture was stirred for 4 hours.
Evaporation of the solvent yielded the corresponding acid chloride as HCI-salt.
Without any further purification, the solid was suspended in 120mL
dichloromethane.
After addition of diisopropylethylamine (12.7mL, 73mmol) and Boc-piparazine (4.8g, 25.5mmol), the reaction was stirred over night at room temperature. The resulting mixture was put into water (500mL) and extracted with dichloromethane (2x100mL).
Drying over sodium sulfate resulted in sufficiently pure product that was used in Step B without any further purification. 1H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 1.63 (s, 9H), 3.21 (dd, 4H), 3.61 (dd, 4H), 7.57 (dd, 1 H), 7.63 (d, 1 H), 7.98 (dd, 1 H), 8.70 (d, 1 H).
StepB
The crude material from Step A was dissolved in trifluoroacetic acid/dichloromethane (75mL, 4/1). After stirring for 2days, the reaction mixture was put into 1 N sodium hydroxide (400mL). Extraction with dichloromethane (2x100mL) and drying over sodium sulfate resulted in sufficiently pure product that was used in Step C without any further purification. 1H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 2.77 (dd, 2H), 2.83 (dd, 1 H), 3.38 (dd, 2H), 3.64 (dd, 1 H), 7.58 (dd, 1 H), 7.62 (d, 1 H), 8.00 (dd, 1 H), 8.67 (d, 1 H).

Step C
The crude material (1.35g, 7.06mmol) from Step B was dissolved in dichloromethane (50mL). After addition of diisopropylethylamine (3.7mL, 21.2mmol), 3-nitrosalicylic acid (1.36g, 7.41 mmol), and PyBrOP (3.62g, 7.77mmol), the resulting mixture was stirred over night at room temperature before being put into 1 N
sodium hydroxide (300mL). Extraction with dichloromethane (2xlOOmL) removed any PyBrOP products. The aqueous phase was acidified with 3N HCI. Adjustment of the pH with saturated sodium carbonate solution to almost neutral crushed the desired compound out of solution. The aqueous phase was subsequently extracted with dichloromethane (3x 100mL).

The combined organic layers of the neutral extraction were dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated, and finally purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol = 20/1) to yield the desired product (1.35g, 16%
over 3 steps). 1H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 3.30-3.95 (m, 8H), 7.22 (m, 1 H), 7.61 (m, 1 H), 7.73 (d, 2H), 8.03 (m, 1 H), 8.17 (m, 1 H), 8.69 (m, 1 H), 10.82 (s, 1 H).

Step D
The nitro-compound (1.35g, 3.79mmol) from Step C was dissolved in methanol (60mL) and stirred with 10% Pd/C under a hydrogen gas atmosphere over night.
The reaction mixture was filtered through Celite and washed thoroughly with methanol.
Finally, the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol = 20/1) to yield the desired product (1.10g, 89 %).

NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 3.50-3.85 (m, 8H), 6.47 (dd 1 H), 6.74 (m, 2H), 7.59 (dd, 1 H), 7.71 (d, 1 H), 8.04 (dd, 1 H), 8.68 (d, 1 H).

O
A + ^NBoc Step Ai N N Step B N N

'Boc O O
Step C \ N/ N^ Step D `N/ N"

Step A
1-Methyl-2-pyrrolecarboxylic acid (2.5g, 20.Ommol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (50mL). After addition of PyBrOP (16.3g, 35.Ommol), diisopropylethylamine (14.OmL, 73.Ommol) and Boc-piparazine (5.5g, 30.Ommol), the reaction was stirred over night at room temperature before being put into I N
sodium hydroxide (200mL). Extraction with dichioromethane (2x100mL) removed all PyBrOP
by-products. The aqueous phase was acidified with 3N HCI. Adjustment of the pH
with saturated sodium carbonate solution to almost neutral precipitated the desired compound. The aqueous phase was subsequently extracted with dichloromethane (3x I OOmL). The combined organic phases of the neutral extraction were dried over sodium sulfate. Removal of the solvent resulted in sufficiently pure product that was used in Step B without any further purification. 1H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 1.59 (s, 9H) 3.21 (dd, 4H), 3.61 (dd, 4H), 3.74 (s, 3H), 6.11 (dd, 1 H), 6.33 (d, 1 H), 7.01 (d, 1 H).
Step B
The crude material from Step A was dissolved in trifluoroacetic acid/dichloromethane (75mL, 4/1). After stirring for 3h, the reaction mixture was put into 1N sodium hydroxide (400mL). Extraction with dichioromethane (3x1 OOmL) and drying over sodium sulfate resulted in sufficiently pure product that was used in Step C without any further purification. 'H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 2.79 (dd, 4H), 3.62 (dd, 4H), 3.76 (s, 3H), 6.11 (dd, 1 H), 6.37 (d, 1 H), 6.96 (d, 1 H).

Step C
The crude material (3.15g, 16.3mmol) from Step B was dissolved in dichioromethane (100mL). After addition of diisopropylethylamine (8.5mL, 49.Ommol), 3-nitrosalicylic acid (3.13g, 17.1 mmol), and PyBrOP (9.11 g, 19.6mmol), the resulting mixture was stirred over night at room temperature before being put into 1 N
sodium hydroxide (400mL). Extraction with dichloromethane (2x1OOmL) removed all PyBrOP
products. The aqueous phase was then carefully acidified with 3N HCI until the color of the solution changes from orange to yellow and the desired compound crashed out of solution.

The aqueous phase was subsequently extracted with dichloromethane (3x 100mL).
The combined organic layers of the acidic extraction were dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo to yield the desired product. 'H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 3.35-3.85 (m, 8H), 3.79 (s, 3H), 6.13 (dd, 1 H), 6.45 (d, 1 H), 7.01 (s, 1 H), 7.22 (dd, 1 H), 7.70 (d, 1 H), 8.16 (d, 1 H), 10.83 (s, 2H).

Step D
The crude nitro-compound from Step C was suspended in methanol (60mL) and stirred with 10% Pd/C under a hydrogen gas atmosphere over night. The reaction mixture was filtered through Celite and washed thoroughly with methanol. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol = 10/1) to yield the desired product (2.61g, 40 %
for 4 steps). 1H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 3.45-4.80 (m, 8H), 3.79 (s, 3H), 6.17 (dd, 1H), 6.45 (m, 2H), 6.78 (m, 2H), 7.01 (d, 1 H).

O 0 N' Boc 0 (NH
N Br + N Boc Step A N
Step B N
HNJ cJ_N) O N N02 ^ NH2 ~ r Step C_ N I/ Step D N N J I/

Step A
2-Bromopyridine N-oxide hydrochloride (1.13g, 5.37mmol) and Boc-piperazine (1.50g, 8.06mmol) were heated to 800 C in pyridine (10mL) over night. The reaction mixture was put into water (300mL) and then extracted with dichloromethane (2xlOOmL). The combined organic phases were dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated, and finally purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol = 10/1) to yield the desired product (500mg, 33 %).
1H NMR (300MHz, d-CDCI3) 1.60 (s, 9H), 3.46 (dd, 4H), 3.78 (dd, 4H), 6.99 (m, 2H), 7.37 (dd, 1 H), 8.33 (d, 1 H).

Step B
The purified product (500mg, 1.79mmol) was stirred for 30 min with 4N
HCI/dioxane (15mL). Evaporation of the solvent yielded the crude amine (465mg) as multiple HCI-salt which was used in Step C without any further purification.
1H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 3.38 (m, 4H), 4.81 (m, 4H), 7.34 (dd, 1 H), 7.55 (d, 1 H), 7.86 (dd, 1 H), 8.55 (d, 1 H).

Step C
The crude material (370mg, 1.48mmol) from Step B was suspended in dichloromethane (20mL). After addition of diisopropylethylamine (2.6mL, 14.8mmol), 3-nitrosalicylic acid (406mg, 2.22mmol), and PyBrOP (1.21 g, 2.59mmol), the mixture was stirred over night at room temperature before being put into 1 N sodium hydroxide (50mL). Extraction with dichloromethane (2x5OmL) removed all PyBrOP products.
The aqueous phase was then carefully acidified (pH - 4-5) with 3N HCI and extracted with dichloromethane (3x 50mL). The combined organic layers of the acidic extraction were dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated in vacuo and purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol = 10/1) to yield the desired product (330mg, 65%).
LCMS calculated: 344.1, found: (M+1)+ 345.1 Step D
Sodium hydrosulfite (1.05g) was dissolved in water (3.OmL) to yield a 1.5N
solution. Addition of dioxane (3.OmL) was followed by injection of conc.
ammonium hydroxide (0.60mL, yields a I.ON concentration). After addition of the nitro-compound (100mg, 0.29mmol), the reaction mixture was stirred for 0.5h. Subsequently, the solvent was removed and the residue suspended in dichloromethane/methanol (10/1).
Filtration through Celite removed most of the salts. Final purification by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol = 5/1) yielded the desired product (68mg, 75%).
LCMS calculated: 314.14, found: (M+1)+ 315.1 N'Bn r NH
Br + ^NBn Step A i \ NJ Step B Nom/
N~ HNJ

O OH O OH
r N N02 Step D N NH2 Step C N,,/I

a,5:~ N N

Step A

4-Bromopyridine hydrochloride (3.0g, 15.4mmol) was dissolved in water (15mL). After addition of N-benzylpiperazine (14.8mL, 85.Ommol) and 500mg copper sulfate, the reaction mixture was heated overnight to 140 C. The resulting product was extracted with ether (5x75mL), dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated.
Final purification by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol/NH4OH =
10/1/0.1) yielded the desired product (2.16g, 55%). 1H NMR (300MHz, d-CDCI3) 2.68 (dd, 4H), 3.45 (dd, 4H), 6.76 (d, 2H), 7.40 (m, 5H), 8.38 (d, 2H).

Step B
The benzylamine (2.16g, 8.54mmol) from Step A, ammonium formate (2.71 g, 43.Ommol) and Pd(C) (10%, 1.0g) was suspended in methanol (50mL) and refluxed for 3h. The palladium was filtered off and the filtrate was concentrated. The sufficiently pure product was used in Step C without any further purification. 1H NMR
(300MHz, d-CDCI3) 2.48 (bs, 1 H), 3.13 (dd, 4H), 3.41 (dd, 4H), 7.78 (d, 2H), 8.39 (d, 2H).

Step C
The crude material (1.15g, 7.06mmol) from Step B was dissolved in dichloromethane (50mL). After addition of diisopropylethylamine (4.7mL, 42.4mmol), 3-nitrosalicylic acid (1.94g, 10.6mmol), and PyBrOP (5.78g, 12.3mmol), the resulting mixture was stirred over night at room temperature before being put into 1 N
sodium hydroxide (300mL). Extraction with dichloromethane (2x1 OOmL) removed all PyBrOP
products. The aqueous phase was carefully acidified to pH - 5-6 with 3N HCI
and extracted with dichloromethane (3x I OOmL). The combined organic layers of the neutral extraction were dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated, and finally purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol/NH4OH = 10/1/0.1) to yield the desired product (850mg, 37% for 2 steps).

Step D
The nitro-compound (850mg, 2.59mmol) from Step C was dissolved in methanol (40mL) and stirred with 10% Pd/C under a hydrogen gas atmosphere over night. The reaction mixture was filtered through Celite and washed thoroughly with methanol. Finally, the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol/
NH4OH = 10/1/0.1) to yield the desired product (650g, 84 %). 'H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 3.40-3.75 (bm, 8H), 6.49 (dd, 1 H), 6.76 (m, 2H), 6.93 (d, 2H), 8.28 (d, 2H).

Bn-NH H + Step 1 BnS.N Step 2 HN
~N-Bn EtOBr N-Bn V__/NH
Br Step 1 N,N'-Dibenzyl-ethane-l,2-diamine (20mL, 0.0813mol), triethylamine (22.66mL, 0.1626mol) and benzene (100mL) were combined in a round bottom flask. A
solution of 2,3-dibromo-propionic acid ethyl ester (11.82mL, 0.0813mol) in benzene (50mL) was added dropwise. The solution was refluxed over night and monitored by TLC
(20% ethyl acetate/hexane). The reaction was cooled to room temperature, then filtered and washed with benzene. The filtrate was concentrated then purified by column chromatography (15% ethyl acetate/hexane). The product was isolated as an oil (25.42g, 0.0752mol, 92%). MS: calculated: 338.20, found: 339.2 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) 1.23 (t, 3H), 2.48 (m, 3H), 2.62 (m, 1 H), 2.73 (m, 1 H), 3.07 (m, 1 H), 3.30 (m, 1 H), 3.42 (d, 1 H), 3.56 (m, 2H), 3.91 (d, 1 H), 4.17 (m, 2H), 7.27 (m, 1OH).

Step 2 In a Parr shaker vessel, the ester (25.43g, 0.075mo1) and methanol (125mL) were combined. The vessel was purged with argon and palladium catalyst (5% on carbon, 2.5g) was added. The system was shaken under an atmosphere of hydrogen overnight. TLC (20% ethyl acetate/hexane) indicated that reaction was complete.
The reaction mixture was filtered through a pad of Celite and washed with methanol.
The filtrate was concentrated and the product isolated as a solid (11.7g, 0.074mo1, 98%).

MS: calculated: 158.11, found:159.2 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) 1.27 (t, 3H), 2.70 (m, 4H), 2.96 (m, 1 H), 3.13 (dd, 1 H), 3.43 (dd, 1 H), 4.18 (m, 2H).

HN)-~, HN~ N~
~NH N

Piperazine-2-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (3.11 g, 0.0197mo1), diisopropylethylamine (5.15mL, 0.0296mo1) and methylene chloride (200mL) were combined in a round bottom flask. While stirring at room temperature, a solution of N,N-dimethylcarbamoyl chloride (1.81 mL, 0.0197mo1) in methylene chloride (20mL) was added dropwise. The reaction was stirred for one hour. After this time the reaction was concentrated and carried on to the next step without further purification.
(99% yield).
MS: calculated: 229.14, found:230.1 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) 1.30 (t, 3H), 2.85 (s, 6H), 3.10 (m, 3H), 3.31 (m, 2H), 3.60 (m, 2H), 4.21 (q, 2H).

Following the procedure described for Example 102, the Products listed in the table below were prepared using the commercially available chloride shown and piperazine-2-carboxylic acid ethyl ester from Preparative Example 101.

Example Chloride Product 1.Yield (%) 2. (M+1)+
103 0 O 0 1. 99%
'S-CI OD 2. 237.1 O 0 \JNH

104 0 1. 62%
O
OEt 2. 253.1 CI N
0 O \JNH

CO2CH2CH3 HO O Step 1 2C
Step 2 c3 H N \N + OH Step 3 HO N N\
N O2N H2N tN
Step 1 3-Nitrosalicylic acid (3.61g, 0.01 97g), DCC (2.03g, 0.0099mo1) and ethyl io acetate (130mL) were combined in a round bottom flask and stirred for 15min. 4-Dimethylcarbamoyl-piperazine-2-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (4.51 g, 0.01 97g) was added, and the reaction was stirred for 72 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated then dissolved in dichloromethane. The organic phase was washed once with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide. The aqueous phase was back extracted once with dichloromethane. The aqueous phase was acidified and wash three times with ethyl acetate. The aqueous phase was concentrated and purified by column chromatography (5% methanol/DCM).
MS: calculated: 394.15, found:395.0 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) 1.32 (t, 3H), 2.86 (m, 7H), 3.15 (m, 1 H), 3.51 (m, 4H), 4.24 (m, 3H), 7.15 (m, 1 H), 7.66 (m, 1 H), 8.20 (m, 1 H), 10.86 (bs, 1 H).

Step 2 4-Dimethylcarbamoyl-1-(2-hydroxy-3-nitro-benzoyl)-piperazine-2-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (0.80g, 0.002mol) and methanol (50mL) were combined in a round bottom flask. The system was purged with argon. To the solution was added 5%
palladium on carbon (-100mg). The flask was purged with hydrogen and stirred overnight. The reaction was filtered through a pad of celite and washed with methanol. The material was concentrated then purified by column chromatography (6% methanol/DCM). Isolated product (0.74g, 0.002mol, 100%).
MS: calculated: 364.17, found:365.1 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) 1.27 (t, 3H), 2.85 (m, 8H), 3.18 (1H), 3.45 (m, 3H), 4.19 (m, 3H), 3.90 (m, 3H) Step 3 1-(3-Amino-2-hydroxy-benzoyl)-4-dimethylcarba moyl-piperazine-2-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (0.74g, 0.002mol) was suspended in a solution of dioxane (1 OmL) and water (1 OmL). Lithium hydroxide (0.26g, 0.0061 mol) was added and the mixture stirred for two hours. The solution was acidified to pH=6 with 3N HCI then extracted with butanol. The extracts were combined, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated.
MS: calculated: 336.14, found:337.1 'H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD) 2.86 (m, 7H), 3.23 (m, 3H), 3.54 (m, 3H), 6.92 (m, 2H), 7.23 (m, 1 H).

Following the procedure described for Example 105, the Products listed in the table below were prepared using the amine from the Preparative Example indicated and 3-nitrosalacylic acid.

Example Aniline Product I.Yield (%) 2. (M+1)+
3. Note 106 103 1. 91%
O CO2H 2. Not HO
observed SO
H2N N \
o -- 3. Rainey nickel used in Step 2 107 104 1. 24%
HO 0 CO2H 2. 360.0 N\-~ 3. For Step H2N \__/N O
/ 1 used 0 PyBrop/
DIEA in DCM

N02 + HN N02 O O
HO OH ~5 St ep A
3-Nitrosalicylic acid (1.0g, 5.5mmol) was dissolved in ethyl acetate (20mL).
1,3-Dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (0.568g, 2.8mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred for approximately 10 minutes and cooled to 0 C. During this time a precipitate formed. Azetidine (0.39mL, 5.8mmol) was added and the reaction was stirred io overnight and allowed to warm to room temperature. After this time the reaction was cooled to 0 C and filtered. The collected solid was washed with chilled ethyl acetate.
The filtrate was concentrated and purified by column chromatography (80%
EtOAc/Hex) to give the product (476mg, 39.0%).
1 H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) 52.40(m, 2H), 4.38(m, 4H), 6.97(m, 1 H), 7.62(d, 1 H), 15 8.12(d, 1 H), 12.88(m, 1 H) ppm.

Step B

N02 ~ NH2 CN 4q OH CN OH
O O
The nitro compound (0.48g, 2.1 mmol) from Preparative Example 32 Step A
20 was dissolved in methanol (25m1) and stirred with 10% Pd/C under a hydrogen gas atmosphere overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite, the filtrate concentrated in vacuo to give the product (344mg, 90%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) 62.52(m, 2H), 4.57(bs, 4H), 6.75(m, 1 H), 6.90(m, 2H), 12.71(bs, 1 H) ppm.

0 1N 4q OH
O

In essentially the same manner as described in Preparative Example 108 above, the morpholino-amine product was obtained.

O
II
I NH O
CIANi fNN
HNJ + I HNJ I

Piperazine (4.9g, 0.057mo1) was dissolved in dichloromethane (I OOmL). N,N'-Dimethylcarbamoyl chloride (1.OmL, 0.011 mol) was added dropwise to the solution at room temperature. The reaction was stirred for one hour. After this time 1 N
potassium hydroxide (200mL) was added. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted three times with dichloromethane. The organic fractions were combined and dried over sodium sulfate. Filtration and concentration provided the product, without further purification, as an oil (1.16g, 13%).
is 1H NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz) 1.95 (s, 1 H), 2.83 (s, 6H), 2.86 (m, 4H), 3.20 (m, 4H).
MS: calculated: 157.12, found: 158.1.

HN NH + CIS HN N
S _ S

Piperazine (4.9g, 0.057mol) was dissolved in 1 N HCI (100mL). A solution of phenylsulfonylchloride (1.45mL, 0.011 mol) in acetonitrile (25mL) was added dropwise to the solution at room temperature. The reaction was stirred for 30 minutes.
After this time the reaction was extracted two times with ethyl acetate. The solution was then made basic with 1 N potassium hydroxide and extracted three times with dichloromethane. The dichloromethane fractions were combined and dried over magnesium sulfate. Filtration and concentration provided the product, without further purification, as a solid (1.22g, 9.4%).
'H NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz) 2.94 (m, 8H), 7.56 (m, 3H), 7.76 (m, 2H).
MS: calculated: 226.08, found: 227.1.

H H + ci.,- HN N,S/

Piperazine (4.9g, 0.057mol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (100mL).
Methanesulfonyl chloride (0.85mL, 0.011 mol) was added dropwise to the solution at room temperature. The reaction was stirred for 30 minutes. After this time 1 N
potassium hydroxide (200mL) was added. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted three times with dichloromethane. The organic fractions were combined and dried over sodium sulfate. Filtration and concentration provided the product, without further purification, as a solid (1.07g, 11 %).
1H NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz) 1.75 (s, 1H), 2.78 (s, 3H), 2.97 (m, 4H), 3.20 (m, 4H).
MS: calculated: 164.06, found: 165.1.

BocN A OCN~~ rNA
~NH
B. TFA HNJ H

Step A
Boc-Piperazine (3.0g, 0.0161 mol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (100mL).
Propylisocyanate (1.51 mL, 0.0161 mol) was added to the solution at room temperature. The reaction was stirred for over night. After this time the reaction was diluted with 1 N potassium hydroxide (200mL) and extracted six times with dichioromethane. The organic fractions were combined and dried over magnesium sulfate. Filtration and concentration provided the product as a solid.

Step B
The product of Step A above, was dissolved in a 30% trifluoroacetic acid/dichioromethane solution and stirred overnight. After this time a 1 N
potassium hydroxide solution (200 mL) was added to the reaction. The aqueous layer was extracted a total of six times with dichioromethane. The organic fractions were is combined and dried over sodium sulfate. Filtration and concentration provided the product (1.37g, 50%).
'H NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz) 0.92 (t, 3H), 1.52 (m, 2H), 2.89 (m, 4H), 3.01 (s, 1 H), 3.18 (m, 2H), 3.37 (m, 4H), 4.61 (bs, I H).
MS: calculated: 171.14, found: 172Ø

O
HNNO \ I rN
H +
CI O HN J

Piperazine (4.9g, 0.0569mol) was dissolved in 1 N HCI (70mL). A solution of phenylchloroformate (1.43mL, 0.0114mol) in acetonitrile (25mL) was added dropwise to the solution at room temperature. The reaction was stirred for 30 minutes.
After this time the reaction was extracted two times with ethyl acetate. The solution was then made basic with 1 N potassium hydroxide and extracted three times with dichloromethane. The dichloromethane fractions were combined and dried over magnesium sulfate. Filtration and concentration provided the product, without further purification, as a solid (2.12g, 18%).

1H NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz) 1.78 (s, 1H), 2.91 (m, 4H), 3.59 (m, 4H), 7.11 (2H), 7.19 (m, 1 H), 7.36 (m, 2H).
MS: calculated: 206.24, found: 207.1.

Following the procedure described for Example 112, the Products listed in the table below were prepared using the commercially available chloroformate shown and piperazine.

Example Chloroformate Product I.Yield (%) 2. (M+1)+

CIA0 rN'k 0 1. 54%
HNJ 2. 144.9 CI )t, o'\-,-- r N)~ 0-'\,---' 1. 17%
HNJ 2. 173.0 CIAO N"kO'J\ 1. 69%
HNJ
2. 173.0 BocN NH + 0 1. Step A rNAPh CI Ph 2. Step B HN ) Step A
Boc-Piperazine (3.01 g, 0.0161 mol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (100mL) along with diisopropylethylamine (5.61 mL, 0.0322mol). Benzoylchloride (1.87mL, 0.0161 mol) was added dropwise to the solution at room temperature. The reaction was stirred for several hours. After this time the reaction was concentrated and the product was purified by column chromatography (10% MeOH/DCM). Boc-Protected to product was isolated as a solid (5.21 g).
hH NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz) 1.47 (s, 9H), 3.45 (m, 8H), 7.41 (m, 5H).
MS: calculated: 290.16, found: 290.8.

Step B
The product from Step A above, was dissolved in a 50% trifluoroacetic acid/dichloromethane solution and stirred overnight. After this time the reaction was diluted with 1 N potassium hydroxide (200mL) and the organic layer was separated.
The aqueous phase was then extracted six times with dichloromethane. The organic fractions were combined and dried over magnesium sulfate. Filtration and concentration provided product (2.93g).
1H NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz) 1.92 (s, 1H), 2.87 (m, 4H), 3.52 (m, 4H), 7.39 (s, 5H).
MS: calculated: 190.11, found: 191.1.

0 \\ ~
11 / 1. Step A /- .S~
BocN~NH + CI-S-N I N `O
O 2. Step B HN J

Step A
Boc-Piperazine (3.0g, 0.0161 mol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (100mL) along with diisopropylethylamine (3.1 mL, 0.0177mo1). N,N'-dimethylsulfamoyl chloride (1.73mL, 0.0161 mol) was added dropwise to the solution at room temperature.
The reaction was stirred for several hours. After this time the reaction was diluted with water (100mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted six times with dichioromethane. The organic fractions were combined and dried over magnesium sulfate. Filtration and concentration provided the product, without further purification, as a solid (4.53g).
1H NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz) 1.47 (s, 9H), 2.84 (s, 6H), 3.21 (m, 4H), 3.48 (m, 4H).
MS: calculated: 293.14, found: 194.1 (M-Boc)+.

Step B
The product from Step A above, was dissolved in a 30% trifluoroacetic acid/dichloromethane solution and stirred overnight. After this time the reaction was diluted with water and 1 N potassium hydroxide was used to make the aqueous layer slightly basic. The aqueous layer was extracted a total of seven times with dichloromethane. The organic fractions were combined and dried over sodium sulfate.
Filtration and concentration provided the product (2.96g).
1H NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz) 2.03 (s, 1H), 2.83 (s, 6H), 2.92 (m, 4H), 3.23 (m, 4H).
MS: calculated: 193.09, found: 194.1.

StepA

0 O 0~1 O 0 0~
O2N e OH CIH-HN 02N N

In essentially the same manner as that described in Preparative Example 105, Step 1, using 3-nitrobenzoic acid instead of 3-nitrosalicylic acid, the methyl ester product was prepared.

Step B

The methyl ester (1.79g, 6.1 mmol) from Step A above, was dissolved in dioxane/water (20mL/15mL) at room temperature. Lithium hydroxide (0.258g, 6.2mmol) was added to the solution. After a few hours more lithium hydroxide was added (0.128g, 3.Ommol) and the reaction was stirred for another hour. After this time the reaction was concentrated and then taken up in water. The solution was extracted two times with ether. The aqueous phase was then acidified and extracted three times with ethyl acetate. The organic fractions were then dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. Product was isolated by column chromatography (95%
EtOAc/Hex, 0.05% HOAc) to give the product (1.66 g, 98%) 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) 1.49(m, 2H), 1.68(m, 1 H), 1.82(m, 2H), 2.44(m, 1 H) 3.32(m, 1 H), 3.58(m, 1 H), 5.57(m, 1 H), 7.65(m, 1 H), 7.80(m, 1 H), 8.32(m, 2H), 10.04(bs, 1 Hppm).

Step C

O
O
02N I e N H2N I N

The nitro compound was dissolved in an excess of methanol (20mL) and covered by a blanket of argon. 5% Palladium on carbon was added (catalytic) and a hydrogen balloon was attached to the flask. The atmosphere of the system was purged under vacuum and replaced with hydrogen. This step was repeated for a total of three times. The reaction was then stirred under hydrogen overnight. After this time the balloon was removed and the solution was filtered through celite followed by several rinses with methanol. The filtrate was concentrated and dried on the vacuum line to provide the desired aniline product (1.33 g, 90%).

'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) 1.40(m, 2H), 1.50(m, 1 H), 1.68(m, 2H), 2.33(m, 1 H) 3.18(m, 1 H), 3.62(m, 1 H), 5.39(m, 1 H), 6.12(bs, 2H), 6.75(m, 2H), 7.12(m, 1 H)ppm.
Mass Spectra, calculated: 248, found: 249.1 (M+1)+

Following the procedure described in Preparative Example 120, but using the commercially available amine and benzoic acid indicated, the intermediate products in the table below were obtained.
Ex. Carboxylic Amine Product 1.Yield Acid (%) 2. (M+1)+
3. Note CJ'NH-HCI
OH CN NH2 1. 21%
0 o- = O OH 2. 251.0 HO O
OOH

CNH-HCI
OH CN NH2 1. 21%
O O- off O O 2. 265.0 HO ono- 3.
Skipped step B
CNH-HCI
123 YO No2 OH CN NH2 1. 15%
O N- O OH 2. 264.0 HO H OWN- 3.
H
Skipped step B

CStd N `-\ NHZ
q NOy + NCH
HOz OH Step B O OH
OH OH
Step A
3-Nitrosalicylic acid (500 mg, 2.7 mmol), 1,3-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC) (563 mg) and ethyl acetate (10 ml-) were combined and stirred for 10 min. (R)-(-)-2-pyrrolidinemethanol (0.27 ml-) was added and the resulting suspension was stirred at room temperature overnight. The solid was filtered off and the filtrate was either concentrated down and directly purified or washed with 1 N NaOH. The aqueous io phase was acidified and extracted with EtOAc. The resulting organic phase was dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Purification of the residue by preparative plate chromatography (silica gel, 5% MeOH/CH2CI2 saturated with AcOH) gave the desired compound (338 mg, 46%, MH+ = 267).

Step B
The product from Step A above was stirred with 10% Pd/C under a hydrogen gas atmosphere overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite, the filtrate concentrated in vacuo, and the resulting residue purified by column chromatography (silica gel, 4% MeOH/CH2CI2 saturated with NH4OH) to give the product (129mg, 43%, MH+=237).

Following the procedure described for Preparative Example 124, but using the commercially available amine or the amine from the Preparative Example indicated and 3-nitrosalicylic acid, the products in the table below were obtained.

Ex. Amine Product 1.Yield Comm. Avail./ (%) From Prep.Ex. 2. (M+1)+

\ N/'-~ \ N~ / \ NH2 1. 37%
\__/NH ~N
0 OH 2. 298.1 126 O~~~OH O--,.,OH
1. 31%
N/--\ NH2 V__/NH 2. 310.1 127 0~ 00~

ON~ ON N \ NH2 1. 68%
k__/NH
0 OH 2. 294.1 CI vO \ CI 1. 54%
/ N/---\ NH2 H 2. 365.9 O OH

0_/, O
1. 45%

0 H 0 _ 2. 316.1 O OH

O N/ 3LNH2 1. 59%
O OH 2. 293.1 O
õS~N N NH2 1. 32%
OH 2. 362.0 1. 36%
/ NH 2. 342.0 0 ~N
O OH
133 112 oS J
`-N N NH2 1. 65%
O
O OH 2. 300.0 J\
O O 1. 48%
N l,/ N/--\ NH2 \_~NH NN / \ 2. 321.1 O OH

135 C`N`\ N QNH2 -N~ (c- 1. 50%
N V__/NH N k_,/N
0 OH 2. 300.1 QNH2 NT 1. 56%
N V__/NH N k___/N
OH 0 2. 299.2 ON N \ NH2 1. 79%
OH 2. 280.1 O

O~N'\ 0 \ NH 1. 64%
o ~N 2 2. 307.1 O OH

O-N/ O-N/ NH2 1. 73%
V__/NH
O OH 2. 304.2 O N NH O~N N NH2 1. 34%
0 OH 2. 264.0 o 1. 40%
OO-N N NH2 2. 307.1 OH
O

HN 1. 91%
d-N/ NH 2. 307.1 OH
O
143 118. 1. 9.0%
2. 326.0 NN \ NH2 OH

144 119 \ 0 1. 42%
iN / / 'N N NH2 2. 329.0 OH
O
145 1. 6.5%
V__/NH NH2 2. 236.1 ~N

NTs Step A Step B `
'NHTs 'NH2=HCI

Step A
To a solution of tosylaziridine [J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1998, 120, 6844-6845) (0.5 g, 2.1 mmol) and Cu(acac)2 (55 mg, 0.21 mmol) in THE (5 ml-) at 0 C was added PhMgBr (3.5 ml, 3.0 M in THF) diluted with THE (8 mL) dropwise over 20 min.
The resulting solution was allowed to gradually warm to rt and was stirred for 12h. Sat. aq.
NH4CI (5 mL), was added and the mixture was extracted with Et20 (3 x 15 mL).
The organic layers were combined, washed with brine (1 x 10 mL), dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude residue was purified by preparative TLC eluting with hexane/EtOAc (4:1) to afford 0.57 g (86% yield) of a solid.
The purified tosylamine was taken on directly to the next step.

Step B
To a solution of tosylamine (0.55 g, 1.75 mmol) in NH3 (20 mL) at -78 C was added sodium (0.40 g, 17.4 mmol). The resulting solution was stirred at -78 C
for 2 h whereupon the mixture was treated with solid NH4CI and allowed to warm to rt.
Once the NH3 had boiled off, the mixture was partitioned between water (10 mL) and CH2CI2 (10 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with CH2CI2 (2 x10 mL). The organic layers were combined,), dried (NaS04), and concentrated under reduced pressure to a volume of -20 mL. 4N HCI in dioxane (5 ml-) was added and the mixture was stirred for 5 min. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the resultant crude residue was recrystallized from EtOH/Et2O to afford 0.30 g (87% yield) of a solid.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 147-156.10 Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 146 but using the requisite tosylaziridines and Grignard reagents listed in the Table below, the following racemic amine hydrochloride products were obtained.

Prep Tosyl Grignard Amine 1.Yield (%) Ex. aziridine Reagent hydrochloride 147 J NTs MeMgBr 1. 19%
fl (\~~ H2.HCI
148 (:DNTs EtMgBr C 1. 56%
r-'NH2-HCI

149 /DNTs n-PrMgBr "1. 70%
(/`NHHCI
150 /NTs i-PrMgCI 1. 41%

NH2=HCI
151 O>Ts BnMgCI 1. 61%
'NH2=HCI

152 MeMgBr 1. 61 JNTs OZH2.HCI %
EtMgBr 1. 66%
153 (>NTs "'NH2=HCI

n-PrMgBr 1. 80%
154 (>NTs NH2 HCI

i-PrMgBr 1. 27%
155 DNTs NH2=HCI
DNTs BnMgCI 1. 79%

'NH2=HCI

156.1 MgBr 52%
~NTs H2N
156.2 r 49%
c1NTs MgB eo 156.3 61 %
BrMg TsN H2N

156.4 57%
BrMg TsN//~ H2N /

156.5 64%
MgBr TsN H2N
156.6 / 64%
MgBr TsN H2N
156.7 ~ = 45%
MgBr TsN H2N
156.8 23%
TsN/ BrMg H2N

156.9 ZO 40%
TsN MgBr H2N
J,,~o 156.10 15%

TsN erMg H2N

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.11 Step A HO 0 HO 0 =y CIH.H2N H H
isomer A isomer B
Step C Step B

CIH.H2P' CIH.H2P-isomer A isomer B
Step A
To a solution of the amine (118mg) from Preparative Example 148 in CH2CI2 (1 Oml) was added triethylamine (120u1), R-Mandelic Acid (1 64mg), DCC (213mg) and DMAP (8.8mg)and let stir for 40hr. The mixture was diluted with CH2CI2 and washed with saturated ammonium chloride, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified by preparative plate chromatography (Hex/EtOAc 4:1) to afford both isomers (A, 86mg, 45%) (B, 90mg, 48%).
Step B
To isomer B (90mg) from above in dioxane (5m1) was added 6M H2SO4 (5mI).
The reaction was heated to 80 C over the weekend. 2M NaOH added to basify the reaction and extracted with ether. Ether layer washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was stirred in 4N HCI in dioxane for 30min, concentrated in vacuo and recrystallized in EtOH/ether to afford 55mg of product (98%).

Step C
Isomer A (86mg) was reacted following the procedure set forth in Step B above to give the amine salt.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.12 HO I / NO2 --MHO , O
O
The above nitro compound was reduced following the Preparative Example 2, Step B.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.13 I NI-12 -" NI-12 To a solution of 1,2-phenylenediame (1.5g) in CH2CI2 (30m1) at 0 C was added TEA (2.91 ml), followed by dropwise addition of McSO2CI (1.07m1). The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stir overnight. 1 M HCl added and the layers were separated. The aqueous layer was adjusted to pH=11 with solid NaOH, extracted with CH2CI2. The basified aqueous layer was then neutralized using and extracted with CH2CI2, dried with Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 1.8g of product (71 %).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.14 N H 2 -~- ~ NI-12 NH2 (:I!::~(NHS02Ph The above compound was prepared using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 156.13, but using PhSO2CI.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.15 NO2 \ NI-12 N-NH N-NH
The nitro compound was reduced following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2, Step B.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.16 HO ~ , Step A Step B
NO N
O NI-12 2 O q NO2 -SON NH2 A _r Step A
The known acid (410mg) above (J.Med.Chem. 1996, 34,4654.) was reacted following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 2, Step A to yield 380mg of an oil (80%).
Step B
The amide (200mg) from above was reacted following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 2, Step B to yield 170mg of an oil (100%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.17 JOH

S Step A S Step B S s C l /

StepA
To a solution of ketone (500mg) in EtOH/water (3:1, 4ml) at room temperature was added hydroxylamine hydrochloride (214mg) followed by NaOH to afford a heterogenous mixture. The reaction was not complete so another equivalent of hydroxylamine hydrochloride was added and refluxed overnight. The reaction was cooled to 0 C and treated with 3N HCI and extracted with CH2CI2, washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 500mg of product (92%).

Step B
To a solution of oxime (300mg) in THE (5ml) at 0 C was added LiAIH4 (266mg) portionwise. The heterogenous solution was stirred at room temperature for 14hr and then refluxed for 8hr. The solution was cooled to 0 C and water, 2M NaOH, water and ether were added to the reaction. The mixture was filtered through a celite pad. The filtrate was treated with 3N HCl. The aqueous layer was cooled to 0 C, basified with NaOH pellets and extracted with ether. The ether layer was dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to afford the product (143mg, 69%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.18 0 Step B
Step A H CO~ /Me H3CO~/CO2H 3 N
OMe H CO S Step C H3CO S

Step A
Methoxyacetic acid (14 mL) in CH2CI2 (120 mL) and cooled in an ice-water bath was treated with DMF (0.9 mL) and oxalyl chloride (21 mL). After stirring at RT
overnight, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo and redissolved in CH2CI2 (120 mL).
N-methyl-N-methoxylamine (20 g) was added and the mixture stirred at RT
overnight.
Filtration and concentration in vacuo afforded the desired amide (21 g, 89%).

Step B
To a solution of the above amide (260mg) in THE (5m1) at -78 C was added a solution of 2-thienyllithium (1 M in THF, 2.15m1). The solution was stirred for 2hr at -78 C and warmed to -20 C for an additional 2hr. The reaction was quenched with saturated ammonium chloride and extracted with CH2CI2, washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 250mg of product (82%).

Step C
The ketone from above (250mg) was reacted via the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 156.17 Steps A and B to yield 176 mg of the amine (79%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.19 S S
Step S Step A --~

cl CI CI
Step A
To a solution of 3-chlorothiophene (1.16m1) in ether (20m1) at -10 C was added n-BuLi (2.5M in hexane, 5m1). After solution was stirred at -10'C for 20min, propionaldehyde (0.82m1) in ether (20m1) was added dropwise and let warm to room to temperature slowly. The reaction was quenched with saturated ammonium chloride and extracted with CH2CI2, washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 1.37g of product (62%).

Step B
The alcohol from Step A above was reacted via the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 75.75, Steps B and C to give the amine.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.20 ,OH
S Step S Step C $

Step A
To a solution of magnesium metal (360mg) in THE (15ml) at 0 C was added 2-bromothiophene (1.45m1) in THE (10ml) dropwise over 20min. The solution was warmed to room temperature for 3hr, recooled to 0 C whereupon a solution of cyclopropylacetonitrile (1g) in ether (30m1) was added dropwise via a syringe and let warm to room temperature and stir overnight. 3M HCI was added and washed with CH2CI2. The aqueous layer was basified with NaOH pellets and extracted with ether, dried with Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 625mg of product (68%).
Step B
The ketone was reacted via the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 156.17 Step A to give the oxime.

Step C
The oxime from above was reacted via the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 156.17 Step B to give the amine.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.21 Step A H3 C O\ Step B O1 CI N Ao- N /N
H3Cd OH Step D NH2 Step C OWN OWN

Step A
To a solution of CH3ONHCH3.HCI (780mg) and acid chloride (1 g) in CH2CI2 at 0 C was added dry pyridine (1.35m1) to afford a heterogenous mixture The solution was warmed to room temperature and stirred overnight. I M HCI was added to the reaction and the organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 1g of product (85%).

Step B
To a solution of Eti (614u1) in ether (5m1) at -78 C was added t-BuLi (1.7M in pentane, 9ml) dropwise. The mixture was warmed to room temperature for 1 hr, cooled to -78 C where the amide (1 g) from Step A in THE (4ml) was added and allowed to warm to 0 C for 2hr. 1 M HCI was added to the reaction and extracted with CH2CI2, washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 500mg of product (63%).

Step C .
To a solution of ketone (800mg) in THE/water (10:1, 20m1) at 0 C was added sodium borohydride (363mg) portionwise. The solution was stirred for 2hr at 0 C.
The mixture was concentrated in vacuo, the residue was dissolved in CH2CI2, washed with 1 N NaOH and brine, dried with Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 560mg of product (69%).

Step D
The alcohol from above was reacted via the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 75.75, Steps B and C to give the amine (176mg, 59%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.22 CN Step A
-~ I
0 ILI-~

Step B

Step A
Cyclopropylacetonitrile (12 mmol) in Et20 (50 ml-) at 0 C was treated with PhMgBr (14 mmol) and the mixture was stirred for 2 hrs at 0 C, then at RT
overnight.
Hydrochloric acid (3 M) was added, and after stirring for an additional 12 hrs, the to mixture was extracted with CH2CI2, washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the desired ketone (1.34 g, 70%).

Step B
Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 156.20 Steps B and C, the amine was prepared.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.23 s The above amine was prepared using the procedures set forth in WO Patent Publication 98/11064.

HO / Step A , \ Step B
N02 > HO i NO ---=

0 NH2 0 NHS02Me Step C

0 NHS02Me 0 NHS02Me Step A
By taking the known carboxylic acid [J. Med. Chem. 1996, 39, 4654-4666] and subjecting it to the conditions outlined in Preparative Example 112, the product can be io prepared.

Step B
Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 2, Step A, except using dimethylamine and the compound from Step A above, the product can be is prepared.
Step C
Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 2, Step B, except using the compound from Step B above, the product can be prepared.

Ho q N02 iN NH2 Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 157, Steps A-C, except using trifluoromethylsulfonyichloride in Step A above, the product can be prepared.
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 500.1 I \ Step A Step B.
N ~
/ N02 ( N02 N NH2 Step A
io By using the nitro-amide from Preparative Example 13.3, Step A, the amidine structure can be prepared following a similar procedure to that in Tetrahedron Lett., 2000, 41 (11), 1677-1680.

Step B
By using the product from Step A and the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 2, Step B, one could obtain the desired amine-amidine.

ALTERNATE PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 500.2 p B
Step A N Ste N/ rQ

0 OMe ~eN OMe ~ I \ Step C
N N I /

N OH /N OH

Step A
By treating the nitro-amide from Preparative Example 13.3, Step B with POCI3 and subsequently MeNH2, according to procedures known in the art, one would obtain the desired compound.

Step B
By treating the product from Step A according to the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.3, Step E, one could obtain the desired compound.

Step C
By using the product from Step B and the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 2 Step B, one would obtain the desired compound.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 500.3 c- ci CI
\ Step A Step B
CI P
CI oo OH
OH
-P=O
cl Step C Step D _ I \

P NO2 Ip OH
Ip OH
Step A
By following a similar procedure as that described in Zh. Obshch. Khim., 27, 1957, 754, 757., but instead using 2,4-dichlorophenol and dimethylphosphinic chloride, one would obtain the desired compound.

Step B
By following a similar procedure as that described in J. Organomet. Chem.;
317, 1986, 11-22, one would obtain the desired compound.
Step C
By following a similar procedure as that described in J. Amer. Chem. Soc., 77, 1955, 6221, one would obtain the desired compound.

Step D
By following a similar procedure as that described in J. Med. Chem., 27, 1984, 654-659, one would obtain the desired compound.

is ALTERNATE PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 500.4 CI CI CI
Step A Me I \ Step B_ I ( \
MeO-P

CI
Step C Step D p I

Step A
By following a similar procedure as that described in Phosphorous, Sulfur Silicon Relat. Elem.; EN; 61, 12, 1991, 119-129, but instead using 4-chlorophenol, one would obtain the desired compound.

Step B
By using a similar procedure as that in Phosphorous, Sulfur Silicon Relat.
Elem.; EN; 61, 12, 1991, 119-129, but instead using MeMgBr, the desired compound could be prepared.

Step C
By following a similar procedure as that described in J. Amer. Chem. Soc., 77, 1955, 6221, one would obtain the desired compound.

Step D
By following a similar procedure as that described in J.Med. Chem., 27, 1984, 654-659, one would obtain the desired compound.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 500.5 H XI\ \\

By following a similar procedure as that set forth in J. Org. Chem. 1998, 63, 2824-2828, but using CH3CCMgBr, one could obtain the desired compound.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 500.6 S Step A Step B 02N S Step C 02N S

Me0 MeO HO HO Br Step D 02N S Step E 02N S Step F 02N ~ S Step G
~: Z/ Me0 N
MeO Br Me0 C02H
O

Step H f I Step I ,N S

HO O N H N
0 HO ~ OEt Step A
By following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.1, Step B using 3-methoxythiophene, one can obtain the desired product.
Step B
By using the product from step A and following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.19, Step E, the desired compound can be obtained.

1s Step Q
By using the product from Step B and following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.20, Step A, one can obtain the desired compound.
Step D
By using the product from Step C and following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.3, Step B, the desired compound can be obtained.

Step E
By treating the product from Step D with n-BuLi at -78 C in THE and quenching the resulting anion with CO2 according to standard literature procedure, one would obtain the desired compound following aqueous acid work up.
Step F
By using the product from Step E and the procedure set forth in Prepartive Example 13.19, Step C, one could obtain the desired compound.

Step G
By using the product from step F and following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.19, Step E, the desired compound can be obtained.

Step H
By using the product from Step G and following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 2, Step B, the desired compound can be obtained.

Step I
By using the product from Step H and following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 19, the desired compound can be prepared.

O V
H N - H N
HUNH2- H H~

To a solution of the HCI salt product (83 mg, 0.50 mmol) from Preparative Example 24, in EtOH (3 ml-) at room temperature was added Et3N (55 L, 0.50 mmol) and the mixture was stirred for 10 min. The cyclobutenedione (100 mg, 0.33 mmol) from Preparative Example 19 in EtOH was then added in a single portion and the mixture was stirred for 12 h at room temperature.

The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and was purified by preparative TLC (4 x 1000 4M plates) eluting with CH2CI2/MeOH (25:1) to afford mg (91 % yield) of the desired product as a solid [MH+ 389.1, mp 241-243 C].

Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 200 but using the io appropriate amine hydrochlorides from Preparative Examples 25-33 as identified and the cyclobutenedione intermediate from Preparative Example 19, the cyclobutenedione products in the Table below were obtained.

Ex. (Prep Ex.) Product 1.Yield (%) Amine 2. MH+
3. mp C
(25) 1. 89%
201 2. 375.1 NH2 N,-yNH2 3. 255.5-257.3 CIHH2'N--Y 0 OH H O

(26) 1. 92%
202 iN N 2. 465.1 /
aHH2N N N~ 3.149.0-152.3 O OH H H O
(27) O 1. 68%
HH _ H 2. 451.1 203 CIHH2'N H H H N I 3. 282-284 (28) 1. 74%
204 HFI 2. 493.1 CIH.H2N?'N H 3. 141 H H

(29) 1. 479.
205 Y~ N N 2. 479.1 CIH.H2N^~( b N 3. 142 (j O OH H H
(30) 1. 41%
206 Y b \ M N 2. 479.1 CIHH2N 0 N N 3. 142 O OH H O
(31) 1. 59%
207 N I N I 2. 479.1 CIHH2'N N N N' ` 3. 141 DEMANDES OU BREVETS VOLUMINEUX
LA PRESENTE PARTIE DE CETTE DEMANDE OU CE BREVETS
COMPREND PLUS D'UN TOME.

NOTE: Pour les tomes additionels, veillez contacter le Bureau Canadien des Brevets.

JUMBO APPLICATIONS / PATENTS

THIS SECTION OF THE APPLICATION / PATENT CONTAINS MORE
THAN ONE VOLUME.

NOTE: For additional volumes please contact the Canadian Patent Office.

Claims (67)

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof wherein A is selected from the group consisting of B is selected from the group consisting of R2 is OH, R3 is selected from the group consisting of -C(O)NHR17, -C(O)NR13R14, and -C(O)NR13OR14;

R4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, cyano, halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, -OH, -CF3, -OCF3, -NO2, -C(O)R13, -C(O)OR13, -C(O)NHR17, -C(O)NR13R14, -SO(t)NR13R14, -SO(t)R13, -C(O)NR13OR14, -NHC(O)R17, unsubstituted or substituted aryl and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, wherein the substituents on the substituted R4 groups are the same or different and independently selected from 1-6 R9 groups;
R5 and R6 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, -CF3, -OCF3, -NO2, -C(O)R13, -C(O)OR13, -C(O)NR13R14, -SO(t)NR13R14, -C(O)NR13OR14, cyano, an unsubstituted or substituted aryl and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl group, wherein the substituents on the substituted R5 and R6 groups are the same or different and independently selected from 1-6 R9 groups;

R7 and R8 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of H, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl, -CO2R13, -CONR13R14, fluoroalkyl, alkynyl, alkenyl and cycloalkenyl, wherein the substituents on the substituted R7 and R8 groups are selected from the group consisting of a) H, b) halogen, c) -CF3, d) -COR13, e) -OR13, f) -NR13R14, g) -NO2, h) -CN, i) -SO2OR13, j) -Si(alkyl)3, k) -Si(aryl)3, l) -Si(R13)2R14, m) -CO2R13, n) -C(O)NR13R14, o) -SO2NR13R14, p) -SO2R13, q) -O(C=O)R13, r) -O(C=O)NR13R14, s) -NR13C(O)R14, and t) -NR13CO2R14;
R8a is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl and cycloalkylalkyl;
R9 is independently selected from 1-6 of the group consisting of:
a) -R13, b) halogen, c) -CF3, d) -COR13, e) -OR13, f) -NR13R14, g) -NO2, h) -CN, i) -SO2R13, j) -SO2NR13R14, k) -NR13COR14, l) -CONR13R14, m) -NR13CO2R14, n) -CO2R13, and R10 and R11 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, -CF3, -OCF3, -NR13R14,-NR13C(O)NR13R14, -OH, -C(O)OR13, -SH, -SO(t)NR13R14, -SO2R13, -NHC(O)R13,-NHSO2NR13R14, -NHSO2R13, -C(O)NR13R14, -C(O)NR13OR14, -OC(O)R13 and cyano;
R12 is hydrogen, -OC(O)R13, or an unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl or unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl group, wherein the substituents on the substituted R12 groups are the same or different and independently selected from 1-6 R9 groups;
R13 and R14 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of H, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl, and unsubstituted or substituted fluoroalkyl, or R13 and R14 taken together when both are attached to a nitrogen atom form an unsubstituted or substituted 3 to 7 membered heterocylic ring containing one to two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen, wherein the substitutents on the substituted R13 and R14 groups are the same or different and independently selected from 1-6 of H, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, fluroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, amino, -C(O)OR15, -C(O)NR15R16, -S(O)t NR15R16, -C(O)R15, -SO2R15, -NHC(O)NR13R14 and halogen;
R15 and R16 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heteroaryl;
R17 is -SO2 alkyl, -SO2 aryl, -SO2 cycloalkyl or -SO2heteroaryl;
R30 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, -CN, -NO2, or -SO2R15;
R31 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl and unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl;
wherein the substituents on the substituted R31 groups are the same or different and independently selected from 1-6 R9 groups; and t is 0, 1 or 2.
2. The compound of Claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein A is selected from the group consisting of:
wherein, R7 is H, fluoroalkyl, alkyl or cycloalkyl;
R8 is H, alkyl, -CF2CH3 or -CF3;
R9 is H, F, Cl, Br, alkyl or -CF3.
3. The compound of Claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein A is selected from the group consisting of:
wherein, R7 is H, -CF3, -CF2CH3, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl or t-butyl;
R8 is H;
R9 is H, F, Cl, Br, alkyl or -CF3, and B is:

wherein:
R2 is OH;
R3 is -C(O) NR73R14;
R4 is H, -NO2, cyano, -CH3 or -CF3;
R5 is H, -CF3, -NO2, halogen or cyano; and R6 is H, alkyl or -CF3;
R11 is H or halogen; and R13 and R14 are the same or different and are independently methyl, ethyl or isopropyl; or R13 and R14 when taken together with the nitrogen they are attached to in the groups -NR13R14, -C(O)NR13R14 -SO2NR13R14, -OC(O)NR13R14, -CONR13R14, -NR13C(O)NR13R14, -SO t NR13R14, -NHSO2NR13R14 form an unsubstituted or substituted 3 to 7 membered, saturated heterocyclic ring optionally containing one additional heteroatom selected from O, S or NR18wherein R18 is selected from H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -C(O)R19, -SO2R19 and -C(O)NR19R20, wherein R19 and are the same or different and each is independently selected from alkyl, aryl and heteroaryl, wherein the substituents on the substituted cyclized R13 and R14 groups are the same or different and independently selected from 1 to 3 of alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, fluoroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, amino, -C(O)OR15, -C(O)NR15R16, -SO t NR15R16, -C(O)R15, -SO2R15, -NHC(O)NR15R16 and halogen, and wherein R15 and R16 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heteroaryl.
4. The compound of Claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein A is selected from the group consisting of:

and B is:

wherein:

R2 is OH;
R3 is -C(O)NR13R14;
R4 is H, -NO2, -CF3, -CH3 or cyano, R5 is H, halogen, -NO2, cyano or -CF3;
R6 is H, -CF3 or alkyl, R7 is H, -CF3, -CF2CH3, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl or t-butyl;

R8 is H;
R9 is H, F, Cl, Br, alkyl, cycloalkyl or -CF3;
R11 is H or halogen; and R13 and R14 are independently methyl or ethyl.
5. The compound of Claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein A is selected from the group consisting of:

and B is wherein, R2 is -OH;
R3 is -CONR13R14;
R4 is H, -CH3 or -CF3;
R5 is H or cyano;
R6 is H, -CH3 or -CF3;
R11 is H, and R13 and R14 are methyl.
6. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate of the compound wherein A is selected from:

wherein, R7 and R8 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of H; optionally substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, CO2R13, CONR13R14, fluoroalkyl, alkynyl, alkenyl, alkynylalkyl, alkenylalkyl, and cycloalkenyl, wherein said substituents on said substituted groups are selected from the group consisting of:
a) cyano;
b) CO2R13;
c) CONR13R14;
d) SO2NR13R14, e) SO2R13;
f) NO2;
g) CF3;
h) -OR13;
i) -NR13R14;

j) -O(C=O)R13;
k) -O(C=O)NR13R14, and l) halogen;
R9 is selected from one or more of the groups consisting of:
a) R7;

b) R8;
c) halogen;
d) -CF3;
e) -COR7;
f) -OR7;
g) -NR7R8;
h) -NO2;
i) -CN;
j) -SO2R7;
k) -SO2NR7R8;
l) -NR7COR8;
m) -CONR7R8;

n) -NR7CO2R8;
o) CO2R7, and B is an optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl group selected from:

wherein, R2 is OH;
R3 is C(O)NR13R14 or C(O)NR13OR14;
R4 is hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, OH, CF3, OCF3, NO2, C(O)R13, C(O)OR13, C(O)NR13R14, SO(t)NR13R14, SO(t)R13, C(O)NR13OR14, cyano, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, wherein the substituents on the optionally substituted groups is one or more R9 groups.
R5 and R6 independently represent hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, CF3, OCF3, NO2, C(O)R13, C(O)OR13, C(O)NR13R14, SO(t)NR13R14, C(O)NR13OR14, cyano, or an optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl group, wherein the substituents on the optionally substituted groups is one or more R9 groups.
R10 and R11 independently represent hydrogen, halogen, CF3, OCF3, NR13R14, NR13C(O)NR13R14, OH, C(O)OR13, SH, SO(t)NR13R14,SO2R13, NHC(O)R13, NHSO2NR13R14, NHSO2R13, C(O)NR13R14, C(O)NR13OR14, OC(O)R13 or cyano.
R12 is hydrogen, OC(O)R13, or an optionally substituted aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, alkyl, cycloalkylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl group;
R13 and R14 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of H; optionally substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, and fluoroalkyl, or R13 and R14 when taken together form an optionally substituted 3 to 7 membered heterocyclic ring containing one to two heteroatoms selected from O, S
and N, and wherein the substituents on the optionally substituted groups is one or more R9 groups; and t is 1 or 2.
7. The use of a compound of formula IA:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a chemokine mediated disease, wherein the chemokine mediated disease is selected from the group consisting of psoriasis, atopic dermatitis, acne, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, adult respiratory disease, arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, septic shock, endotoxic shock, gram negative sepsis, toxic shock syndrome, stroke, cardiac and renal reperfusion injury, glomerulonephritis or thrombosis, Alzheimer's disease, graft vs. host reaction, allograft rejections, cystic fibrosis, malaria, acute respiratory distress syndrome, delayted type hypersensitivity reaction, atherosclerosis and cerebral and cardiac ischemia, wherein:

A is selected from the group consisting of:
wherein the above rings of said A groups are substituted with 1 to 6 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups;

wherein one or both of the above rings of said A groups are substituted with 1 to 6 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups;

wherein the above phenyl rings of said A groups are substituted with 1 to 3 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups;
and B is selected from the group consisting of n is 0 to 6; p is 1 to 5; X is O, NH, or S; Z is 1 to 3;
R2 is OH;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of: -C(O)NHR17, -C(O)NR13R14 and -C(O)NR13OR14;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, cyano, halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, -OH, -CF3, -OCF3, -NO2, -C(O)R13, -C(O)OR13, -C(O)NHR17, -C(O)NR13R14, -SO(t)NR13R14, -SO(t)R13, -C(O)NR13OR14, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted aryl group and each substitutent is independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups;
and wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted heteroaryl group and each substitutent is independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups;
each R5 and R6 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, -CF3, -OCF3, -NO2, -C(O)R13, -C(O)OR13, -C(O)NR13R14, -SO(t)NR13R14, -C(O)NR13OR14, cyano, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl group; wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted aryl group and each substitutent is independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups; and wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted heteroaryl group and each substitutent is independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups;
each R7 and R8 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl, -CO2R13, -CONR13R14, alkynyl, alkenyl, and cycloalkenyl; and wherein there are one or more substituents on said substituted R7 and R8 groups, wherein each substitutent is independently selected from the group consisting of:
a) halogen, b) -CF3, C) -COR13, d) -OR13, e) -NR13R14, f) -NO2, g) -CN, h) -SO2OR13, i) -Si(alkyl)3, wherein each alkyl is independently selected, j) -Si(aryl)3, wherein each alkyl is independently selected, k) - Si(R13)2R14, wherein each R13 is independently selected, l) -CO2R3, m) -C(O)NR13R14, n) -S02NR13R14, o) -S02R13, p) -OC(O)R13, q) -OC(O)NR13R14, r) -NR13C(O)R14 , and s) -NR13CO2R14;
R8a is selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl and cycloalkylalkyl;
each R9 is independently selected from the group consisting of:
a) -R13, b) halogen, c) -CF3, d) -COR13, e) -OR13, f) -NR13R14, g) -NO2, h) -CN, i) -SO2R13, j) -SO2NR13R14, k) -NR13COR14, l) -CONR13R14 , m) -NR13CO2R14, n) -CO2R13, o) p) alkyl substituted with one or more -OH groups, q) alkyl substituted with one or more -NR13R14 group, and r) -N(R13)SO2R14;
each R10 and R11 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, halogen, -CF3, -OCF3, -NR13R14, -NR13C(O)NR13R14, -OH, -C(O)OR13, -SH, -SO(t)NR13R14, -SO2R13, -NHC(O)R13, -NHSO2NR13R14, -NHSO2R13, -C(O)NR13R14, -C(O)NR13OR14, -OC(O)R13 and cyano;
R12 is selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, -C(O)OR13, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl group; wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on the substituted R12 groups and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups;
each R13 and R14 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocyclic, unsubstituted or substituted fluoroalkyl, and unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkylalkyl; wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted R13 and R14 groups and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, -CF3, -OH, alkoxy, aryl, arylalkyl, fluroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, -N(R40)2, -C(O)OR15, -C(O)NR15R16, -S(O)t NR15R16, -C(O)R15, -SO2R15 provided that R15 is not H, halogen, and -NHC(O)NR15R16; or R13 and R14 taken together with the nitrogen they are attached to in the groups -NR13R14, -C(O)NR13R14, -SO2NR13R14, -OC(O)NR13R14, -CONR13R14, -NR13C(O)NR13R14, -SO t NR13R14, -NHSO2NR13R14 form an unsubstituted or substituted saturated heterocyclic ring, said ring optionally containing one additional heteroatom selected from the group consisting of: O, S and NR18;
wherein there are 1 to 3 substituents on the substituted cyclized R13 and R14 groups and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, aryl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, arylalkyl, fluoroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, amino, -C(O)OR15, -C(O)NR15R16, -SO t NR15R16, -C(O)R15, -SO2R15 provided that R15 is not H, -NHC(O)NR15R16, -NHC(O)OR15, halogen, and a heterocylcoalkenyl group;

each R15 and R16 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heteroaryl;
R17 is selected from the group consisting of: -SO2alkyl, -SO2aryl, -SO2cycloalkyl, and -SO2heteroaryl;
R18 is selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -C(O)R19, -SO2R19 and -C(O)NR19R20;
each R19 and R20 is independently selected from the group consisting of:
alkyl, aryl and heteroaryl;
R30 is selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, cycloalkyl, -CN, -NO2 and -SO2R15 provided that R15 is not H;
each R31 is independently selected from the group consisting of:
unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl and unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl; wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted R31 groups and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups;
each R40 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl and cycloalkyl; and t is 0, 1 or 2.
8. The compound of Claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein B is selected from the group consisting of:

wherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of: -C(O)NR13R14, and all other substituents are as defined for formula I;

wherein all substituents are as defined for formula I;
wherein all substituents are as defined for formula I;

wherein all substituents are as defined for formula I;
wherein all substituents are as defined for formula I;
wherein all substituents are as defined for formula I;

wherein all substituents are as defined for formula I;
wherein all substituents are as defined for formula I;

wherein all substituents are as defined for formula I;
wherein all substituents are as defined for formula I; and wherein all substituents are as defined for formula I.
9. The compound of Claim 8, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein B is:

wherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of: -C(O)NR13R14.
10. The compound of Claim 9, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein R13 and R14 are the same or different alkyl group.
11. The compound of Claim 8, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein B is:

12. The compound of Claim 11, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein R13 and R14 are the same or different alkyl group.
13. The compound of Claim 8, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein B is:

14. The compound of Claim 13, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein R11 is H.
15. The compound of Claim 13 or 14, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein R3 is -C(O)NR13R14.
16. The compound of any one of Claims 13 to 15, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein R13 and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, unsubstituted heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl.
17. The compound of Claim 16, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein one of R13 or R14 is alkyl.
18. The compound of Claim 17, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein said alkyl is methyl.
19. The compound of Claim 8, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein B is:

20. The compound of any one of Claims 8 to 19, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein A is
21. The compound of Claim 20, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein R9 is 1-3 groups as defined in claim 1, provided that when R9 is R13 then R13 is other than H.
22. The compound of Claim 21, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein R9 is 1-3 groups R13 and said R13 is an alkyl group.
23. The compound as defined in any one of Claims 20 to 22, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein R7 and R8 are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of: H and alkyl.
24. The compound of Claim 23, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein R7 is H, and R8 is alkyl.
25. The compound of Claim 1 selected from the group consisting of:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
26. The compound of Claim 1 selected from the group consisting of or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
27. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
28. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
29. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
30. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
31. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
32. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
33. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
34. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
35. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
36. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
37. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
38. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
39. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
40. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
41. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
42. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
43. The use of a compound as defined in any one of Claims 1 to 6 and 8 to 42, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, for the manufacture of a medicament for treating a chemokine mediated disease wherein the chemokine mediated disease is selected from the group consisting of psoriasis, atopic dermatitis, acne, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, adult respiratory disease, arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, septic shock, endotoxic shock, gram negative sepsis, toxic shock syndrome, stroke, cardiac and renal reperfusion injury, glomerulonephritis or thrombosis, Alzheimer's disease, graft vs. host reaction, allograft rejections, cystic fibrosis, malaria, acute respiratory distress syndrome, delayed type hypersensitivity reaction, atherosclerosis and cerebral and cardiac ischemia.
44. The use of a compound as defined in any one of Claims 1 to 6 and 8 to 42, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, for the manufacture of a medicament for treating cancer.
45. The use of a compound as defined in any one of Claims 1 to 6 and 8 to 42, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, for the manufacture of a medicament for treating cancer in combination with the use of an anticancer agent for the manufacture of a medicament for treating cancer.
46. The use of Claim 45, wherein the anti-cancer agent is selected from the group consisting of alkylating agents, antimetabolites, natural products and their derivatives, hormones, anti-hormones, anti-angiogenic agents and steroids, and synthetics.
47. The use of a compound as defined in any one of Claims 1 to 6 and 8 to 42, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, for the manufacture of a medicament for inhibiting angiogenesis.
48. The use of a compound as defined in any one of Claims 1 to 6 and 8 to 42, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, for the manufacture of a medicament for inhibiting angiogenisis in combination with the use of at least one anti-angiogenesis compound for the manufacture of a medicament for inhibiting angiogenesis.
49. The use of a compound as defined in any one of Claims 1 to 6 and 8 to 42, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, for the manufacture of a medicament for treating a disease selected from the group consisting of gingivitis, respiratory viruses, herpes viruses, hepatitis viruses, HIV, kaposi's sarcoma associated virus and atherosclerosis.
50. The use of a compound as defined in any one of Claims 1 to 6 and 8 to 42, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for treating an angiogenic ocular disease.
51. The use of Claim 50 wherein the angiogenic ocular disease is selected from the group consisting of ocular inflammation, retinopathy of prematurity, diabetic retinopathy, macular degeneration with the wet type preferred and corneal neovascularization.
52. The use of Claim 44 wherein the cancer treated is melanoma, gastric carcinoma, or non-small cell lung carcinoma.
53. The use of Claim 45 wherein the cancer treated is melanoma, gastric carcinoma; or non-small cell lung carcinoma.
54. The use of Claim 46, wherein the cancer treated is melanoma, gastric carcinoma, or non-small cell lung carcinoma.
55. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound as defined in any one of Claims 1 to 6 and 8 to 42, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
56. A sodium salt of any of the compounds of any one of Claims 1 to 6 and 8 to 42.
57. A calcium salt of any of the compounds of any one of Claims 1 to 6 and 8 to 42.
58. A pharmaceutical composition comprising the salt of Claim 56 or 57 in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
59. A compound of the formula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
60. Use of a compound as defined in claim 27, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof for treating chronic obstructive pulmonary disease.
61. Use of a compound as defined in claim 27, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof for treating asthma.
62. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound as defined in claim 27, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, for use in treating chronic obstructive pulmonary disease.
63. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound as defined in claim 27, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, for use in treating asthma.
64. Use of a compound as defined in claim 59, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof for treating chronic obstructive pulmonary disease.
65. Use of a compound as defined in claim 59, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof for treating asthma.
66. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound as defined in claim 59, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, for use in treating chronic obstructive pulmonary disease.
67. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound as defined in claim 59, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, for use in treating asthma.
CA2444031A 2001-04-16 2002-04-15 3,4-di-substituted cyclobutene-1,2-diones as cxc-chemokine receptor ligands Expired - Lifetime CA2444031C (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US28402601P 2001-04-16 2001-04-16
US60/284,026 2001-04-16
PCT/US2002/012681 WO2002083624A1 (en) 2001-04-16 2002-04-15 3,4-di-substituted cyclobutene-1,2-diones as cxc-chemokine receptor ligands

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
CA2444031A1 CA2444031A1 (en) 2002-10-24
CA2444031C true CA2444031C (en) 2012-02-21

Family

ID=23088576

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CA2444031A Expired - Lifetime CA2444031C (en) 2001-04-16 2002-04-15 3,4-di-substituted cyclobutene-1,2-diones as cxc-chemokine receptor ligands

Country Status (31)

Country Link
EP (2) EP1381590B1 (en)
JP (3) JP4499993B2 (en)
KR (2) KR100952531B1 (en)
CN (2) CN1990457A (en)
AR (1) AR035825A1 (en)
AT (2) ATE458715T1 (en)
AU (3) AU2002311841B2 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0208957B8 (en)
CA (1) CA2444031C (en)
CY (2) CY1109908T1 (en)
CZ (1) CZ20032831A3 (en)
DE (2) DE60235507D1 (en)
DK (2) DK1381590T3 (en)
EC (1) ECSP034809A (en)
ES (2) ES2287284T3 (en)
HK (2) HK1057538A1 (en)
HU (1) HUP0401783A3 (en)
IL (3) IL158262A0 (en)
MX (1) MXPA03009441A (en)
MY (2) MY138202A (en)
NO (2) NO330790B1 (en)
NZ (3) NZ543869A (en)
PE (1) PE20021084A1 (en)
PL (2) PL208928B1 (en)
PT (2) PT1381590E (en)
RU (1) RU2344123C9 (en)
SI (2) SI1818325T1 (en)
SK (1) SK287598B6 (en)
TW (2) TW200736196A (en)
WO (1) WO2002083624A1 (en)
ZA (1) ZA200307905B (en)

Families Citing this family (74)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7132445B2 (en) 2001-04-16 2006-11-07 Schering Corporation 3,4-Di-substituted cyclobutene-1,2-diones as CXC-chemokine receptor ligands
US20040106794A1 (en) 2001-04-16 2004-06-03 Schering Corporation 3,4-Di-substituted cyclobutene-1,2-diones as CXC-chemokine receptor ligands
WO2003031440A1 (en) 2001-10-12 2003-04-17 Schering Corporation 3,4-di-substituted maleimide compounds as cxc-chemokine receptor antagonists
US8246969B2 (en) 2001-11-16 2012-08-21 Skinmedica, Inc. Compositions containing aromatic aldehydes and their use in treatments
US6878709B2 (en) 2002-01-04 2005-04-12 Schering Corporation 3,4-di-substituted pyridazinediones as CXC chemokine receptor antagonists
BR0308739A (en) * 2002-03-18 2005-01-11 Schering Corp Combination Treatments for Chemokine Mediated Diseases
GB0218326D0 (en) * 2002-08-07 2002-09-11 Glaxo Group Ltd Compounds
WO2004033440A1 (en) 2002-10-09 2004-04-22 Schering Corporation Thiadiazoledioxides and thiadiazoleoxides as cxc- and cc-chemokine receptor ligands
GB0302094D0 (en) 2003-01-29 2003-02-26 Pharmagene Lab Ltd EP4 receptor antagonists
US7893096B2 (en) 2003-03-28 2011-02-22 Novartis Vaccines And Diagnostics, Inc. Use of small molecule compounds for immunopotentiation
ES2325077T3 (en) 2003-04-03 2009-08-25 Merck Patent Gmbh DERIVATIVES OF 1- (PHENYLAMIDE) -2- (4- (3-OXO-MORFOLIN-4-IL) -PHENYLAMIDE) OF PIRROLIDIN-1,2-DICARBOXYL ACID AND COMPOUNDS COMPARED AS INHIBITORS OF THE XA COAGULATION FACTOR, FOR TROMBOEMBOLIC DISEASE TREATMENT.
MXPA05011183A (en) * 2003-04-18 2005-12-14 Schering Corp Synthesis of 2-hydroxy-n, n-dimethyl -3-[[2-[1(r) -(5-methyl -2-furanyl) propyl]amino] -3, 4-dioxo-1 -cyclobuten- 1-yl]amino] benzamide.
PL1651612T3 (en) 2003-07-22 2012-09-28 Astex Therapeutics Ltd 3,4-disubstituted 1h-pyrazole compounds and their use as cyclin dependent kinases (cdk) and glycogen synthase kinase-3 (gsk-3) modulators
GB0320983D0 (en) * 2003-09-08 2003-10-08 Biofocus Plc Compound libraries
EP1664007B1 (en) 2003-09-23 2009-12-23 Fermion Oy Preparation of quetiapine
GB0324269D0 (en) 2003-10-16 2003-11-19 Pharmagene Lab Ltd EP4 receptor antagonists
DE602004016211D1 (en) 2003-12-19 2008-10-09 Schering Corp Thiadiazole als cxc- und cc-chemokinrezeptorliganden
MXPA06007205A (en) 2003-12-22 2006-08-31 Schering Corp Isothiazole dioxides as cxc- and cc- chemokine receptor ligands.
RU2388756C2 (en) * 2004-01-30 2010-05-10 Шеринг Корпорейшн Crystalline polymorphous forms of cxc chemokine receptor ligands
EP1742914A1 (en) * 2004-02-27 2007-01-17 Schering Corporation Cyclobutenedione groups-containing compounds as inhibitors of hepatitis c virus ns3 serine protease
EP1634573A1 (en) * 2004-08-16 2006-03-15 The Procter and Gamble Company 2-(Amino or substituted Amino)-5,6-substituted Phenol compounds, dyeing compositions containing them, and use thereof
AU2005277582A1 (en) 2004-08-16 2006-03-02 The Procter & Gamble Company 2-(amino or substituted amino)-5, 6-substituted phenol compounds, dyeing compositions containing them, and use thereof
BRPI0515488A (en) 2004-09-20 2008-07-29 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc heterocyclic derivatives and their use as therapeutic agents
WO2006034338A1 (en) 2004-09-20 2006-03-30 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Heterocyclic derivatives and their use as mediators of stearoyl-coa desaturase
US7829712B2 (en) 2004-09-20 2010-11-09 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Pyridazine derivatives for inhibiting human stearoyl-CoA-desaturase
WO2006034315A2 (en) 2004-09-20 2006-03-30 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Heterocyclic derivatives for the treatment of diseases mediated by stearoyl-coa desaturase enzymes
BRPI0515482A (en) 2004-09-20 2008-07-22 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc heterocyclic derivatives and their uses as therapeutic agents
TW200624427A (en) 2004-09-20 2006-07-16 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc Heterocyclic derivatives and their use as therapeutic agents
CN101083994A (en) 2004-09-20 2007-12-05 泽农医药公司 Heterocyclic derivatives and their use as therapeutic agents
EP1674457B1 (en) 2004-12-23 2009-06-03 GPC Biotech AG Derivatives of squaric acid with anti-proliferative activity
AR054425A1 (en) 2005-01-21 2007-06-27 Astex Therapeutics Ltd PIPERIDIN ADDITION SALTS 4-IL-ACID AMID 4- (2,6-DICLORO-BENZOILAMINO) 1H-PIRAZOL-3-CARBOXILICO.
US8404718B2 (en) 2005-01-21 2013-03-26 Astex Therapeutics Limited Combinations of pyrazole kinase inhibitors
BRPI0611187A2 (en) 2005-06-03 2010-08-24 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc amino thiazide derivatives as inhibitors of human stearoyl coa desaturase
MX2008000366A (en) * 2005-06-29 2008-03-07 Schering Corp Di-substituted oxadiazoles as cxc-chemokine receptor ligands.
ES2353401T3 (en) 2005-06-29 2011-03-01 Schering Corporation OXIDIAZOLOPIRAZINAS AND TIADIAZOLOPIRAZINAS 5,6-DI-REPLACED AS LIGANDOS OF THE CXC-CHEMIOCINE RECEIVER.
DE102005035742A1 (en) * 2005-07-29 2007-02-01 Merck Patent Gmbh New cyclobut-3-ene-1,2-dione derivatives are kinase inhibitors useful for treating e.g. cancer, hypertension, diabetes, glaucoma and bacterial infections
RU2458051C2 (en) * 2005-11-24 2012-08-10 ДОМПЕ ФА.Р.МА С.п.А. (r)-arylalkylamino derivatives and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
MX2008015004A (en) * 2006-05-26 2008-12-05 Abbott Lab Inhibitors of polo-like kinases.
CL2007001714A1 (en) 2006-06-12 2008-01-18 Schering Corp Pharmaceutical composition comprising 2-hydroxy-n, n-dimethyl-3 - [[2 - [[1 (r) -5-methyl-2-furanyl) propyl] amino] -3,4-dioxy-1-cyclobutene- 1-yl] amino] benzamide and at least one excipient selected from a wetting agent, a binder, a solvent and a disintegrant, useful for treating an inflammatory disease such as arthritis and asthma.
JP2009542700A (en) * 2006-07-07 2009-12-03 シェーリング コーポレイション 3,4-Disubstituted cyclobutene-1,2-diones as CXC chemokine receptor ligands
US8450348B2 (en) 2007-02-21 2013-05-28 Forma Tm, Llc Derivatives of squaric acid with anti-proliferative activity
US8183281B2 (en) 2007-06-06 2012-05-22 Novartis Ag CXC-chemokine receptor ligands
EP2178826B1 (en) * 2007-07-03 2017-05-17 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Process and intermediates for the synthesis of 1,2-substituted 3,4-dioxo-1-cyclobutene compounds
WO2009156421A1 (en) * 2008-06-24 2009-12-30 Topotarget A/S Squaric acid derivatives as inhibitors of the nicotinamide
UA103198C2 (en) 2008-08-04 2013-09-25 Новартис Аг Squaramide derivatives as cxcr2 antagonists
WO2010063802A1 (en) * 2008-12-05 2010-06-10 Novartis Ag 3, 4-di-substituted cyclobutene- 1, 2 -diones as cxcr2 receptor antagonists
WO2011143430A1 (en) 2010-05-12 2011-11-17 Abbott Laboratories Indazole inhibitors of kinase
FR2961695B1 (en) 2010-06-29 2012-07-06 Galderma Res & Dev USE OF COMPOUNDS IN THE TREATMENT OR PREVENTION OF SKIN DISORDERS
SG191879A1 (en) 2011-01-07 2013-08-30 Allergan Inc Melanin modification compositions and methods of use
EP3287438A1 (en) 2011-09-02 2018-02-28 Novartis AG Choline salt of an anti-inflammatory substituted cyclobutenedione compound
FR2981936B1 (en) 2011-10-28 2013-12-20 Galderma Res & Dev NOVEL DI-SUBSTITUTED DIAMINO-3,4-CYCLOBUTENE-3-DIONE-1,2 COMPOUNDS USEFUL IN THE TREATMENT OF CHEMOKINE MEDIATED PATHOLOGIES.
FR2981934B1 (en) 2011-10-28 2013-12-20 Galderma Res & Dev NOVEL DI-SUBSTITUTED DIAMINO-3,4-CYCLOBUTENE-3-DIONE-1,2 COMPOUNDS USEFUL IN THE TREATMENT OF CHEMOKINE MEDIATED PATHOLOGIES.
FR2981935B1 (en) 2011-10-28 2015-08-07 Galderma Res & Dev NOVEL DI-SUBSTITUTED DIAMINO-3,4-CYCLOBUTENE-3-DIONE-1,2 COMPOUNDS USEFUL IN THE TREATMENT OF CHEMOKINE MEDIATED PATHOLOGIES.
CN103242210B (en) * 2012-02-09 2014-09-24 北京艾百诺科技有限公司 Mulin acetate containing substituted squaric acid and application thereof
SG11201405761WA (en) 2012-03-16 2014-10-30 Axikin Pharmaceuticals Inc 3,5-diaminopyrazole kinase inhibitors
US8889730B2 (en) 2012-04-10 2014-11-18 Pfizer Inc. Indole and indazole compounds that activate AMPK
CN103382192A (en) * 2012-05-04 2013-11-06 同创医药(苏州)有限公司 Preparation of N-monosubstituted piperazine derivatives
CA2905242C (en) 2013-03-15 2016-11-29 Pfizer Inc. Indole compounds that activate ampk
CN103214327A (en) * 2013-03-22 2013-07-24 郑州泰基鸿诺药物科技有限公司 Aromatic ring or heteroaromatic trifluoromethyl ketone compound and preparation method thereof
US10046002B2 (en) 2013-08-02 2018-08-14 Syntrix Biosystems Inc. Method for treating cancer using chemokine antagonists
US10561676B2 (en) * 2013-08-02 2020-02-18 Syntrix Biosystems Inc. Method for treating cancer using dual antagonists of CXCR1 and CXCR2
NZ631142A (en) 2013-09-18 2016-03-31 Axikin Pharmaceuticals Inc Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of 3,5-diaminopyrazole kinase inhibitors
TWI703133B (en) 2014-12-23 2020-09-01 美商艾克斯基製藥公司 3,5-diaminopyrazole kinase inhibitors
FR3030515B1 (en) 2014-12-23 2017-01-20 Galderma Res & Dev NOVEL ANTAGONIST COMPOUNDS FOR CHEMOKINE CXCR1 AND CXCR2 RECEPTORS AND THEIR USE IN THE TREATMENT OF CHEMOKINE MEDIATED PATHOLOGIES
TWI734715B (en) * 2015-11-19 2021-08-01 美商卡默森屈有限公司 Modulators of chemokine receptors
TWI724056B (en) 2015-11-19 2021-04-11 美商卡默森屈有限公司 Inhibitors of cxcr2
WO2018073248A1 (en) 2016-10-17 2018-04-26 Icm (Institut Du Cerveau Et De La Moelle Épinière) Prognosis of demyelinating diseases patients and treatment thereof
JP2020530848A (en) * 2017-08-14 2020-10-29 アラーガン、インコーポレイテッドAllergan,Incorporated 3,4-Disubstituted 3-cyclobutene-1,2-dione and its use
WO2019067332A1 (en) 2017-09-27 2019-04-04 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Compositions and methods for treating cancer with a combination of programmed death receptor (pd-1) antibodies and a cxcr2 antagonist
US11207294B2 (en) 2018-01-08 2021-12-28 Chemocentryx, Inc. Methods of treating generalized pustular psoriasis with an antagonist of CCR6 or CXCR2
CU20210016A7 (en) 2018-09-21 2021-10-12 Pfizer N-SUBSTITUTED DIOXOCYCLOBUTENYLAMINE-3-HYDROXY-PICOLINAMIDES USEFUL AS INHIBITORS OF CCR6
CN110041309B (en) * 2019-04-04 2022-01-28 广东工业大学 2-carboxypiperazine-linked tacrine-8-amino (hydroxy) quinoline derivative and preparation and application thereof
AU2020363360A1 (en) * 2019-10-07 2022-05-05 D.E Shaw Research, Llc Arylmethylene heterocyclic compounds as Kv1.3 potassium shaker channel blockers
KR20220162364A (en) * 2021-06-01 2022-12-08 부산대학교 산학협력단 Novel squaramide derivatives and use thereof

Family Cites Families (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0692915A (en) * 1992-07-28 1994-04-05 Sumitomo Metal Ind Ltd 1,2-diaminocyclobutene-3,4-dione derivative and its use
GB9312210D0 (en) * 1993-06-14 1993-07-28 Smithkline Beecham Plc Chemical compounds
GB9316111D0 (en) * 1993-08-04 1993-09-22 Pfizer Ltd Benzopyrans
US5354763A (en) * 1993-11-17 1994-10-11 American Home Products Corporation Substituted N-heteroaryl and N-aryl-1,2-diaminocyclobutene-3,4-diones
US5466712A (en) * 1994-11-04 1995-11-14 American Home Products Corporation Substituted n-aryl-1,2-diaminocyclobutene-3,4-diones
AU686896B2 (en) * 1994-11-16 1998-02-12 American Home Products Corporation Diaminocyclobutene-3,4-diones
EP0915651A4 (en) * 1996-06-27 2001-10-24 Smithkline Beecham Corp Il-8 receptor antagonists
AU6250298A (en) * 1997-01-30 1998-08-25 American Home Products Corporation Substituted hydroxy-anilino derivatives of cyclobutene-3,4-diones
US5840764A (en) * 1997-01-30 1998-11-24 American Home Products Corporation Substituted hydroxy-anilino derivatives of cyclobutene-3,4-diones
US6211220B1 (en) * 1998-11-23 2001-04-03 Cell Pathways, Inc. Method for treating neoplasia with amino or pyridylamino cyclobutene derivatives
WO2000035855A1 (en) * 1998-12-14 2000-06-22 American Home Products Corporation 3,4-diamino-3-cyclobutene-1,2-dione derivatives which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4
ES2249059T3 (en) * 1998-12-16 2006-03-16 Bayer Healthcare Ag NEW BIFENYL COMPOUNDS AND BIFENYL ANALOGS AS INTEGRINE ANTAGONIST
US6518283B1 (en) * 1999-05-28 2003-02-11 Celltech R&D Limited Squaric acid derivatives
AR033803A1 (en) * 2000-03-01 2004-01-07 Smithkline Beecham Corp DIANILINO ESCUARANO COMPOUNDS, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS THAT UNDERSTAND THEM, AND THE USE OF THE SAME IN THE MANUFACTURE OF MEDICINES TO TREAT CHEMIOQUINE MEDIUM-RELATED DISEASES
HUP0302382A3 (en) * 2000-05-30 2004-09-28 Smithkline Beecham Corp Il-8 receptor antagonists and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
JP2004521106A (en) * 2001-01-16 2004-07-15 スミスクライン・ビーチャム・コーポレイション IL-8 receptor antagonist
MXPA03008946A (en) * 2001-03-30 2004-05-21 Smithkline Beecham Corp Methods of synthesizing phenol-containing compounds.
BR0308739A (en) * 2002-03-18 2005-01-11 Schering Corp Combination Treatments for Chemokine Mediated Diseases

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
ES2287284T3 (en) 2007-12-16
SK12882003A3 (en) 2004-06-08
EP1381590A1 (en) 2004-01-21
ES2340207T3 (en) 2010-05-31
IL158262A0 (en) 2004-05-12
KR20030092074A (en) 2003-12-03
AU2010212484A1 (en) 2010-09-09
EP1818325B1 (en) 2010-02-24
IL158262A (en) 2012-05-31
NO330790B1 (en) 2011-07-18
CN1289471C (en) 2006-12-13
DE60220778T2 (en) 2008-03-06
KR100952531B1 (en) 2010-04-12
PT1818325E (en) 2010-05-12
SI1818325T1 (en) 2010-06-30
JP4499993B2 (en) 2010-07-14
DE60235507D1 (en) 2010-04-08
HK1107818A1 (en) 2008-04-18
MY149050A (en) 2013-07-15
JP2009179641A (en) 2009-08-13
NO20110050L (en) 2003-12-08
BRPI0208957B1 (en) 2018-10-09
ATE458715T1 (en) 2010-03-15
PE20021084A1 (en) 2002-12-20
PT1381590E (en) 2007-08-06
DE60220778D1 (en) 2007-08-02
NZ529551A (en) 2006-02-24
CY1109908T1 (en) 2014-09-10
PL208928B1 (en) 2011-06-30
EP1818325A2 (en) 2007-08-15
JP2004532846A (en) 2004-10-28
DK1381590T3 (en) 2007-10-22
CA2444031A1 (en) 2002-10-24
AU2010212484B2 (en) 2012-04-12
RU2003133448A (en) 2005-06-10
BRPI0208957B8 (en) 2021-05-25
CY1109989T1 (en) 2014-09-10
ZA200307905B (en) 2005-03-30
MXPA03009441A (en) 2004-02-12
NO20034612D0 (en) 2003-10-15
JP2010053151A (en) 2010-03-11
BR0208957A (en) 2004-06-22
SK287598B6 (en) 2011-03-04
ATE365154T1 (en) 2007-07-15
DK1818325T3 (en) 2010-05-31
CN1516687A (en) 2004-07-28
IL201754A0 (en) 2010-06-16
HUP0401783A2 (en) 2005-01-28
HK1057538A1 (en) 2004-04-08
PL207255B1 (en) 2010-11-30
CZ20032831A3 (en) 2004-03-17
RU2344123C2 (en) 2009-01-20
NZ543869A (en) 2007-09-28
TW200736196A (en) 2007-10-01
CN1990457A (en) 2007-07-04
TWI316930B (en) 2009-11-11
SI1381590T1 (en) 2007-10-31
NO20034612L (en) 2003-12-08
NZ560453A (en) 2009-03-31
WO2002083624A1 (en) 2002-10-24
JP5294418B2 (en) 2013-09-18
ECSP034809A (en) 2004-02-26
HUP0401783A3 (en) 2005-06-28
EP1381590B1 (en) 2007-06-20
AU2002311841B2 (en) 2006-09-14
RU2344123C9 (en) 2009-05-20
PL367129A1 (en) 2005-02-21
AU2006203679A1 (en) 2006-09-14
MY138202A (en) 2009-05-29
EP1818325A3 (en) 2008-02-13
AR035825A1 (en) 2004-07-14
KR20100008794A (en) 2010-01-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CA2444031C (en) 3,4-di-substituted cyclobutene-1,2-diones as cxc-chemokine receptor ligands
US7132445B2 (en) 3,4-Di-substituted cyclobutene-1,2-diones as CXC-chemokine receptor ligands
AU2002311841A1 (en) 3,4-di-substituted cyclobutene-1,2-diones as cxc-chemokine receptor ligands
US7947720B2 (en) 3,4-di-substituted cyclobutene-1,2-diones as CXC-chemokine receptor ligands
US20040186142A1 (en) Thiadiazoledioxides and thiadiazoleoxides as CXC- and CC- chemokine receptor ligands
US20040034229A1 (en) 3,4-Di-substituted maleimide compounds as CXC chemokine receptor antagonists
CA2550189A1 (en) Thiadiazoles as cxc- and cc- chemokine receptor ligands
CA2436351A1 (en) 3,4-di-substituted cyclobutene-1, 2-diones as cxc chemokine receptor antagonists
US20030204085A1 (en) 3, 4-Di-substituted cyclobutene-1,2-diones as CXC-chemokine receptor antagonists
EP1697354B1 (en) Isothiazole dioxides as cxc- and cc- chemokine receptor ligands
US20040063709A1 (en) 3,4-di-substituted pyridazinediones as CXC chemokine receptor antagonists
US20040097547A1 (en) 3,4-Di-substituted cyclobutene-1,2-diones as CXC-chemokine receptor ligands

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
EEER Examination request
MKEX Expiry

Effective date: 20220419